Rohde & Schwarz SMM100A User Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 344 / 1088

background image

Configuring the RF signal

R&S

®

SMM100A

344

User Manual 1179.1341.02 ─ 05

Remote command:
n.a.

Step

Sets the step width for the RF level sweep in dB.

The "RF level sweep" mode increases or decreases the level value linearly by the set
value.

Remote command:

[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic]

Setting Characteristics

Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behavior of the RF signal level
for the specific application.

"Auto"

Sets the RF output level automatically according to the selected
mode.
In this mode, the instrument provides the highest dynamic range and
fastest setting times, as specified in the data sheet.
The RF signal is shortly blanked when the step attenuator is switch-
ing.

"Uninterrupted"

Suppresses blanking at level transitions. Frequency transitions can
lead to an RF level blanking due to hardware specific switching
points.
This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument. The step
attenuator is fixed.

Note:

Do not use the mode "I/Q Modulator > Optimization Mode > High
Quality" in combination with the modes "RF Level > Setting Charac-
teristics > Uninterrupted/Strictly Monotone".
The high quality I/Q optimization leads to RF signal interruption. The
requirements of the RF level modes "Uninterrupted" and "Strictly
Monotone" can not be fulfilled.

"Strictly Monotone"

Executes signal level changes monotonically increasing or decreas-
ing.
The setting makes sure that increasing the level value exclusively
results in an increased output level, and vice versa.
All electronic switches, which might affect the monotonicity are fixed.
The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching
algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior.

"Constant-VSWR"

Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector,
due to changed level settings.

"Continuous-Phase"

Suppresses phase discontinuities.
This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument and the step
attenuator is fixed (equates to "Strictly Monotone").

Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode

«
...
342
343
344
345
346
...
»

Summary of Contents for SMM100A

Page 1: ...R S SMM100A Vector Signal Generator User Manual 1179134102 Version 05 Ý Y2 ...

Page 2: ... This manual describes firmware version FW 5 00 166 xx and later of the R S SMM100A 2022 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Muehldorfstr 15 81671 Muenchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a registered trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 1179 ...

Page 3: ...ards white papers etc 19 2 Safety and regulatory information 20 2 1 Safety instructions 20 2 2 Labels on R S SMM100A 22 2 3 Warning messages in the documentation 23 3 Getting started 24 3 1 Preparing for use 24 3 1 1 Lifting and carrying 24 3 1 2 Unpacking and checking 24 3 1 3 Choosing the operating site 24 3 1 4 Setting up the R S SMM100A 25 3 1 5 Considerations for test setup 27 3 1 6 Connectin...

Page 4: ...ignal flow at a glance 67 3 4 3 Internal baseband source Baseband block 68 3 4 4 Digital baseband input BB input Block 69 3 4 5 Additional white gaussian noise AWGN block 69 3 4 6 I Q stream mapper block 69 3 4 7 I Q modulator I Q mod block 69 3 4 8 Analog I Q output I Q analog block 69 3 4 9 RF and analog modulations RF block 70 3 4 10 Applications examples of the R S SMM100A 70 3 5 Instrument co...

Page 5: ... 6 1 Required options 147 4 6 2 About ARB 148 4 6 3 ARB settings 152 4 6 4 How to create generate and play waveform files 162 4 6 5 Tags for waveforms data and control lists 177 4 7 Generating notched signals 194 4 7 1 Required options 194 4 7 2 About the notch filters 194 4 7 3 Notch filter settings 195 4 7 4 AWGN test signal 198 4 8 Reducing the crest factor 200 4 9 Generating multi segment wave...

Page 6: ...pairing the signal 262 5 1 Adding noise to the signal 262 5 1 1 Required options 262 5 1 2 About the AWGN generator 262 5 1 3 AWGN block 266 5 1 4 AWGN settings 267 5 1 5 How to configure the noise generator for receiver tests 274 5 2 Impairing the signal 276 5 2 1 Required options 276 5 2 2 About the linear I Q impairments 276 5 2 3 Analog and digital impairments settings 278 5 2 4 How to optimiz...

Page 7: ...ency settings 312 7 9 3 Reference output settings 314 7 9 4 Adjustment settings 316 7 9 5 Using the reference frequency for instruments synchronization 316 7 10 Varying the RF signal in list or sweep mode 319 7 10 1 Signal generation and triggering in the sweep and list modes 321 7 10 2 About sweep mode 329 7 10 3 About list mode 332 7 10 4 Significant parameters and functions 334 7 10 5 Sweep mod...

Page 8: ... 441 9 1 Synchronizing instruments 441 9 2 Generating time aligned baseband signals 441 9 2 1 Connecting multiple instruments in primary secondary instrument mode 442 9 2 2 Triggering several instruments with a common trigger signal 447 9 3 Control and operation of external instruments 448 9 3 1 Prerequisites for control of external instruments from the R S SMM100A 448 9 3 2 Test setups 449 9 3 3 ...

Page 9: ... 2 How to create and access data and control lists 501 10 6 Exporting and importing remote command lists 502 10 7 Loading importing and exporting lists 502 10 8 Using the file manager 503 10 8 1 File manager settings 504 10 8 2 Map network share settings 505 10 8 3 How to display all saved files 507 10 8 4 How to map a network folder 507 10 9 How to transfer files from and to the instrument 509 10...

Page 10: ...requently used settings as favorites 542 11 3 1 User menu settings 543 11 3 2 How to use the user menu for fast adjustments 544 11 3 3 Define user key actions settings 546 11 3 4 How to assign actions to the User key 547 11 4 Managing licenses and license keys 549 11 4 1 Manage license keys settings 550 11 4 2 Using the license server 556 11 4 3 How to occupy or extend a license 558 11 4 4 How to ...

Page 11: ...Tus QUEStionable 595 12 4 6 Operation status register STATus OPERation 595 12 4 7 Application of the status reporting system 595 12 4 8 Reset values of the status reporting system 597 12 5 Remote access settings 598 12 5 1 Network settings 598 12 5 2 VISA resource strings 601 12 5 3 GPIB address settings 603 12 5 4 RS232 settings 603 12 5 5 Instrument emulations settings 604 12 5 6 Remote connecti...

Page 12: ...to manual operation 633 12 9 Automating tasks with remote command scripts 633 12 9 1 Show SCPI command 636 12 9 2 Displaying an SCPI list 636 12 9 3 SCPI recording export settings 637 12 9 4 How to record create SCPI lists 639 12 9 5 How to convert and save SCPI lists 642 12 9 6 How to find out the SCPI commands for GUI functions 643 12 10 Operating the R S SMM100A remotely using VNC 643 12 10 1 H...

Page 13: ...and SLISt subsystems 699 13 15 SCONfiguration subsystem 713 13 15 1 Multi instrument configuration 716 13 15 2 I Q stream mapping 717 13 15 3 External RF and I Q instruments 718 13 16 SOURce subsystem 731 13 16 1 Connector settings 731 13 16 2 SOURce BBIN subsystem 739 13 16 3 Analog modulation subsystems 747 13 16 4 SOURce BB subsystem 767 13 16 5 SOURce CORRection subsystem 875 13 16 6 SOURce FR...

Page 14: ...s 1000 14 3 Device specific notifications 1000 14 4 Querying notifications 1002 14 5 Resolving network connection failures 1003 14 6 Measuring USB cable quality 1004 14 7 Requesting instrument configuration and specifications 1004 14 7 1 Hardware configuration settings 1005 14 7 2 Versions options settings 1006 14 7 3 How to query instrument configuration 1008 14 7 4 How to request the data sheet ...

Page 15: ...ttings 1029 16 4 Disposal 1029 Annex 1030 A Reference information for remote control 1030 A 1 Telnet program examples 1030 A 2 Extensions for user files 1035 A 3 Hardware interfaces 1035 A 3 1 GPIB Bus interface 1036 B Unit shortcuts 1038 Glossary List of the often used terms and abbreviations 1040 List of commands 1045 Index 1066 ...

Page 16: ...Contents R S SMM100A 16 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 ...

Page 17: ...tion via touchscreen with block diagram as key element Graphical signal monitoring at practically every point in the signal flow SCPI macro recorder and code generator for generating executable remote control code from manual operating steps for MATLAB CVI etc For more information see data sheet 1 2 What s new This manual describes firmware version FW 5 00 166 xx and later of the R S SMM100A Compa...

Page 18: ...ption of the specific functions of an option Basic information on operating the R S SMM100A is not included The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the R S SMM100A The help offers quick context sensitive access to the complete information for the base unit and the software options All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Inter net 1 3 3 Ser...

Page 19: ...t smm100a 1 3 7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software See www rohde schwarz com firmware smm100a 1 3 8 Application notes application cards white pa...

Page 20: ...s Products from the Rohde Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards To use the products safely follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits Intended use and limits are described in the ...

Page 21: ...ll over If the product has foldable feet always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure sta bility The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is moved without lifting it The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the prod uct but not an extra load If stacking is possible keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause injury If you m...

Page 22: ...l Cleaning the product Use a dry lint free cloth to clean the product When cleaning keep in mind that the casing is not waterproof Do not use liquid cleaning agents Meaning of safety labels Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards Potential hazard Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage Heavy product Be careful when lifting moving or carrying th...

Page 23: ...s in the documentation A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of The sig nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do not follow the safety precautions WARNING Potentially hazardous situation Could result in death or serious injury if not avoided CAUTION Potentially hazardous situation Could result in minor or moderate...

Page 24: ...l Use it to protect the control elements and con nectors when transporting or shipping the R S SMM100A later See also Chapter 15 Transporting on page 1012 3 Using the delivery notes check the equipment for completeness 4 Check the equipment for damage If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged contact Rohde Schwarz 3 1 3 Choosing the operating site Specific operating conditions ensure p...

Page 25: ...nsure that the surface can support the weight of the product For information on the weight see the data sheet 2 CAUTION Foldable feet can collapse See Setting up the product on page 21 Always fold the feet completely in or out With folded out feet do not place any thing on top or underneath the product 3 WARNING A stack of products can fall over and cause injury Never stack more than three product...

Page 26: ...ct on page 21 2 NOTICE Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack To mount the R S SMM100A in a rack 1 Use an adapter kit that fits the dimensions of the R S SMM100A to prepare the instrument for rack mounting a Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R S SMM100A For the order num ber see data sheet b Mou...

Page 27: ...ity shielded cables especially for the following connector types BNC Double shielded BNC cables How to To connect to non screwable connectors BNC on page 30 SMA Double shielded SMA cables How to To connect to Ref In Ref Out reference 1 GHz on page 32 USB Double shielded USB cables How to Chapter 3 1 8 Connecting USB devices on page 29 See also Chapter 14 6 Measuring USB cable quality on page 1004 ...

Page 28: ... connector on the rear panel of the instrument Only use the AC power cable delivered with the R S SMM100A 2 Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data sheet 3 1 7 Connecting to LAN Network environment Before connecting the product to a local area network LAN consider the following Install the latest...

Page 29: ... S SMM100A You can also use them for firmware updates Connect the USB storage device to any of the USB connectors To connect USB devices with external power supply 1 NOTICE Connected devices with external power supply can feed back current into the 5 V power supply of the USB interface and thus damage the R S SMM100A Ensure that there is no connection between the positive pole of the power supply ...

Page 30: ... Make sure that signal power and DC limits as given in the data sheet 3 If the R S SMM100A is switched on deactivate the RF output before connecting an RF cable to the RF connector In the block diagram select the block RF RF Level RF ON Off 4 Use a high quality RF cable that matches the RF connector type See Cable selection and electromagnetic interference EMI on page 27 To connect to non screwabl...

Page 31: ... common connectors provided by Rohde Schwarz It is considered as general information and therefore can contain connector types that do not apply to your instrument See RF on page 40 Table 3 1 Connector types and torque limits Type Torque limit Nut opening lb Inch Nm Inch mm N 13 3 1 5 3 4 20 SMA 5 0 56 5 16 8 3 5 mm 8 0 9 5 16 8 2 92 mm 8 0 9 5 16 8 2 4 mm 8 0 9 5 16 8 1 85 mm 8 0 9 5 16 8 1 0 mm ...

Page 32: ...rewable connectors on page 30 3 1 12 Connecting to HS Dig I Q The HS Dig I Q connector comprises a QSFP Quad Small Form factor Pluggable socket that has two components a QSFP cage and a QSFP connector The QSFP cable is equipped with the QSFP plug 1 2 3 1 QSFP plug 2 QSFP cage 3 QSFP connector The connector is located on the rear panel To connect to HS Dig I Q interface 1 For connection use the QSF...

Page 33: ...on page 28 1 Set the switch on the power supply to position I The switch is located on the rear panel The LED of the On Standby key is orange 2 Wait until the oven controlled oscillator OCXO warms up For the warm up time see data sheet 3 Press the On Standby key Key and LED are located on the front panel The LED changes to green The R S SMM100A boots When starting for the first time the R S SMM100...

Page 34: ...sition 0 The LED of the On Standby key is switched off 2 Disconnect the R S SMM100A from the power source 3 2 Instrument tour This chapter explains the control elements and the connectors of the R S SMM100A The views of the front panel and the rear panel help you to get familiar with the instru ment and to perform first steps For specifications of the interfaces see the data sheet The meanings of ...

Page 35: ... 40 7 Sensor page 40 8 User x page 40 9 USB page 41 10 On Standby page 37 3 2 1 1 Touchscreen The block diagram and the most important settings are displayed on the screen on the front panel Also the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to quickly reconfigure the signal flow The screen is touch sensitive offering an alternative means of user interaction for quick a...

Page 36: ...interface element that can be clicked by a mouse pointer can also be tapped on the screen to trigger the same behavior Using the touchscreen the following tasks among others can be performed by the tap of your finger Changing a setting Selecting new settings Scrolling through the list of parameters Saving or recalling settings Opening and closing dialogs See also Chapter 3 5 Instrument control on ...

Page 37: ...ys status messages error messages and warnings Help Displays context sensitive help text On Standby The On Standby key switches the instrument from the standby to the ready state or vice versa The LED above the On Standby key indicates the instrument state see Chap ter 3 1 13 Switching on or off on page 33 Function keys Function keys provide access to most common generator settings and functions A...

Page 38: ...tor Thus they have the same function as an Enter key INSERT key Toggles between insert and overwrite mode Esc key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes if the edit mode is not active Quits the edit mode if the edit mode is active In dialog boxes that contain a Can cel button it activates that button For Edit dialog boxes the following mechanism is used If data entry has been started it retains the orig...

Page 39: ...eric edit dialog box move the cursor In a list scroll forward and backward through the list entries In a table move the selection bar horizontally In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scrollbar move the scrollbar Display keys The display keys arrange different windows on the display Table 3 7 Display keys Display key Assigned functions Next window Toggles between the active dialogs Resize wi...

Page 40: ...rt center or www rohde schwarz com support for information How to Chapter 3 1 9 Connecting to RF on page 30 Sensor Connector for R S NRP sensors A power sensor is connected to the R S SMM100A by inserting the male connector To disconnect pull the connector by its sleeve You cannot disconnect the sensor sim ply by pulling at the cable or the rear part of the connector The R S SMM100A supports the u...

Page 41: ...SB Device are available on the rear panel How to Chapter 3 1 8 Connecting USB devices on page 29 3 2 2 Rear panel tour This section provides an overview of the connectors on the rear panel of the instru ment For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet 1 2 3 Figure 3 4 R S SMM100A rear panel controls and connectors R S SMM B9 1 Connectors for rack use external reference signal exte...

Page 42: ...43 2 3 Ref In Ref Out page 43 4 Inst Trig page 46 5 User x page 43 6 EFC page 44 7 Serial number six digits in the string 1440 8002 02 serial number checksum 8 LO In LO Out page 44 9 IEC 625 IEEE 488 page 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 3 6 System drive power switch power supply monitor LAN and USB connectors 1 System drive HDD page 44 2 AC power supply connector and switch page 44 3 USB USB Device page 45 ...

Page 43: ...MM100A in a rack on page 26 RF Rear panel RF output connectors for use of the instrument in a 19 rack See RF on page 40 How to Chapter 3 1 4 2 Mounting the R S SMM100A in a rack on page 26 Chapter 3 1 9 Connecting to RF on page 30 Ref In Ref Out Input output for external reference signal BNC connectors for reference signals from 1 MHz to 100 MHz SMA connectors for 1 GHz reference signals How to Ch...

Page 44: ... 488 General purpose interface bus GPIB interface for remote control of the instrument The interface is in compliance with the standards IEC 625 IEEE 488 and SCPI Use this interface to connect a computer for remote control of the R S SMM100A To set up the connection use high quality shielded cables See Cable selection and elec tromagnetic interference EMI on page 27 See also Chapter A 3 1 GPIB Bus...

Page 45: ...S SMM B9 Connectors for the input output of high speed digital I Q signals for example from and to Rohde Schwarz instruments For more information see data sheet The interface is a QSFP Quad Small Form factor Pluggable module It supports max bandwidth of up to 50 Gsample s with optical active cables How to Chapter 3 1 12 Connecting to HS Dig I Q on page 32 T M C BNC multipurpose input output trigge...

Page 46: ...al analog I Q signals Note The R S SMM100A also assigns the internal signal of the LF generator to the I output connector Therefore consider that you cannot output the analog I Q signal and the internal LF signal at the same physical connector simultaneously See the data sheet and in the user manual section Chapter 7 11 Analog modula tions on page 357 Use the connectors for connections as follows ...

Page 47: ...is manually operated via the touchscreen Try out the following Generating an unmodulated carrier 47 Generating a digitally modulated signal 50 Triggering the instrument with an external signal 52 Enabling and configuring a marker signal 57 Verifying the generated signal with the graphics display 58 Saving and recalling settings 61 Generating an EUTRA LTE signal 64 3 3 1 Generating an unmodulated c...

Page 48: ...er 1 955 and press the GHz key The on screen keypad closes and the frequency value is displayed 3 On the Status Bar tap the Level field and enter the level in the same way 4 Select Block Diagram RF Block On to enable the output of the generated unmodulated signal Trying out the instrument ...

Page 49: ... signal is output at the RF connector at the front panel of the R S SMM100A Connect RF of the R S SMM100A to a signal analyzer for example R S FSW to dis play the generated signal Figure 3 9 Simplified test setup For the required settings of the signal analyzer refer to its user manual or its online help Trying out the instrument ...

Page 50: ... R S SMM B9 Option custom digital modulation R S SMM K520 Option frequency R S SMM B1006 The initial situation is not the instrument s preset state but rather the configuration described in Chapter 3 3 1 Generating an unmodulated carrier on page 47 1 In the block diagram select Baseband and navigate to the section Misc Cus tom Digital Mod The Custom Digital Modulation dialog opens 2 In the Custom ...

Page 51: ... tab and observe the used Modulation Type Figure 3 10 Display of the used modulation type The instrument activates automatically I Q Mod uses the internal trigger and clock signals and generates a WCDMA 3GPP signal modulated with a QPSK 45 offset modulation Trying out the instrument ...

Page 52: ...t For example by triggering the instrument internally or externally from the DUT This example illustrates the general principle of external triggering and extends the configuration performed in Chapter 3 3 2 Generating a digitally modulated signal on page 50 by the configuration of the required trigger signal and connector settings This test setup requires one signal analyzer like the R S FSW as a...

Page 53: ... you check the current configuration before cabling or further instrument s configurations 1 To display an overview of the current mapping of the logical signals to the connec tors perform one of the following In the block diagram select the Trigger Marker Clock status LEDs on the left side of the Baseband block Select Baseband Trigger Marker Clock The instrument uses its internal trigger and cloc...

Page 54: ...t the User 1 2 connectors The User 3 connector is an input for the Global Trigger 1 signal Find the physical location of each connector Use the built in Trigger Marker Clock Show function to display the location of the selected connector A blinking marker on the front rear panel view also indicates the selected connector To reconfigure the trigger settings We assume that the instrument is configur...

Page 55: ...obal Trigger 1 The instrument expects an external global trigger event In the current configura tion the Global Trigger signal has to be supplied at the input connector User 2 The Trigger Marker Clock status LEDs in the block diagram confirm that an exter nal trigger signal is selected the signal generation is however stopped Trying out the instrument ...

Page 56: ... test setup The figure depicts the cabling as a general principle particular test setups do not require all con nections at the same time The Figure 3 13 depicts the location of the connectors and explains the connection as principle In practice you would rather substitute the analyzer by a DUT like a base station BS Other than in the example the DUT can be the source for the reference signal Inst...

Page 57: ...SMM100A can output marker signals or markers also to the generated signal The R S SMM100A provides several regular marker sig nals and marker signals specific to the firmware option With suitable marker settings for instance you can mark slot or frame boundaries or mark the start of a particular modulation symbol This example extends further the configurations performed in Chapter 3 3 2 Generat in...

Page 58: ... the spectra of the configured signals before you enable the RF output of the instrument The R S SMM100A provides a build in function to represent the generated signal on a graphical signal display We demonstrate this feature by showing the characteristics at one particular point of the signal processing chain You can however display the sig nal characteristics at other different stages This examp...

Page 59: ...ialog opens To visualize the signal 1 In the Graphics Configuration dialog select Mode Constellation 2 Select Source Baseband 3 Select Add to enable signal display A new thumbnail minimized view indicating the active diagram appears in the Taskbar 4 Press the thumbnail graphic The graphic enlarges and the diagram is displayed in a normal size Trying out the instrument ...

Page 60: ...wo finger pinching for magnifying images on your cellphone 6 In the Constellation Diagram dialog select Configure to return to the Graphics Configuration dialog Close the Graphics Configuration dialog This action has no effect on the configured graphics but on the dialog itself The block diagram displays the current signal routing It indicates that frequency and power offsets are enabled and displ...

Page 61: ...ts later we save the instrument settings to a file To save the instrument settings to a file We assume a test configuration as described in Chapter 3 3 4 Enabling and configur ing a marker signal on page 57 1 Press the Save Rcl key on the front panel 2 In the Save Recall dialog box select Operation Mode Save Tap the Filename use the on screen keyboard and enter MyTestSignal Trying out the instrume...

Page 62: ... file 1 Press the Preset button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the saved user settings are restored afterwards 2 Press the Save Rcl key 3 In the Save Recall dialog select Recall operation Navigate to the directory of the saved file Select the MyTestSignal file 4 Tap the Recall button All instrument settings are restored and the display resembles the instrument dis...

Page 63: ...ough information on the changed settings visualize all parameters that have been changed from their default state Try out the following Tap and hold on an empty space in the block diagram to access the context sensi tive menu Select Mark All Parameters Changed from Preset All changed parameters are highlighted See also Chapter 10 File and data management on page 483 Trying out the instrument ...

Page 64: ...nd the features provided by the firmware option The example aims rather to help you get familiar with the settings and configuration principle common for the digital standards We use one of the provided EUTRA test models E TM to show how to generate a test signal upon a quick selection 1 On the R S SMM100A front panel press the Preset key to start out in a defined instrument configuration 2 In the...

Page 65: ...A LTE General tab select Test Models The test models is a function for quick selection and settings adjustment according to one of the various EUTRA test models E TM A standard File Select function enables you to select form files with predefined settings Tip On the front panel press the Help key to retrieve detailed information on the current settings and on the contents of the predefined files 4...

Page 66: ... the dialog 6 On the Status Bar tap the Frequency and Level fields and enter new values for example 2 1432 GHz and 20 dBm Select RF On The instrument generates an EUTRA LTE test signal with the selected channel bandwidth frequency and level Trying out the instrument ...

Page 67: ...band characteristics The baseband section of the R S SMM100A is fully digital It contains the hardware for generating and processing I Q signals in realtime or generating signals with an arbitrary waveform generator 3 4 2 Signal flow at a glance The R S SMM100A is equipped with a large touchscreen that displays a block dia gram The block diagram represents the signal flow and the general stages th...

Page 68: ... on the minimum requirements and the interdependencies between the provided options refer to the R S SMM100A data sheet Table 3 12 Required options per functional block excerpt Functional block Required option Baseband R S SMM B9 BB Input AWGN R S SMM K62 I Q Stream Mapper I Q Mod e g R S SMM B1006 I Q Analog e g R S SMM B1006 I Q Digital RF e g R S SMM B1006 3 4 3 Internal baseband source Baseban...

Page 69: ...seband signals can be shifted in frequency and phase or boosted in power 3 4 5 Additional white gaussian noise AWGN block The AWGN block is displayed only in instruments equipped with the option R S SMM K62 This block controls the additional white Gaussian noise generator AWGN An additive white noise is required for measurements of mobile radio base stations 3 4 6 I Q stream mapper block As one of...

Page 70: ...tions Generation of digitally modulated signal The main field of application of the R S SMM100A is the generation of digitally modulated signals The R S SMM100A generates a digitally modulated signal in several ways using the internal baseband generator using the externally applied digital baseband signals or in an analog wideband I Q operation Generation of a wanted signal or an interfering signa...

Page 71: ...k Touchscreen Touchscreen operation is the most direct way to interact Almost all control ele ments and actions on the screen are based on the standard operating system con cept You can tap any user interface element to set parameters in dialog boxes enter data scroll within a dialog etc as if you work with a mouse pointer Tapping the screen works like clicking mouse buttons Touch quickly click Se...

Page 72: ...en Using a mouse pointer in the display Using a key on the instrument or on a keyboard 3 5 3 Understanding the display information The block diagram of the R S SMM100A displays all main settings and generator states divided into three main operation areas 2 3 1 Figure 3 15 Block diagram 1 Status bar frequency and level display 2 Block diagram 3 Taskbar softkey bar Status bar 73 Block diagram 73 Ta...

Page 73: ...he output signal Most of the status buttons are virtual keys you can use to open a corresponding menu or dia log 3 5 3 2 Block diagram The block diagram shows the current configuration and the signal flow in the generator with the aid of function blocks connected by signal lines 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 11 Baseband domain digital RF domain analog 1 10 12 Connector icons RF analog digital 2 9 Con...

Page 74: ...unctional block Represents a basic task in signal generation The push button provides access to any number of associated actions to accomplish the task On Off checkbox and the block label quickly activates the basic task 5 7 Graphics indicator Denotes that the signal is displayed graphically Baseband signal 5 stream signal 7 6 8 Signal line digital analog Shows the currently configured signal flow...

Page 75: ...played in the taskbar Use this softkey to open a selection list with the remaining active dialogs and the Diagram function 3 5 3 4 Additional display characteristics The following section provides a short insight on the indication of the screen in general and significant elements that you see under specific operating modes in dialogs or set tings Appearance of active elements Active elements like ...

Page 76: ... 2 2 1 Status indicators 2 Key parameter values Scroll bar handle An arrow icon that appears when you touch a scroll bar helps you to scroll in a dia log or list Progress indicators A busy icon indicates a currently running process If a process takes some time a progress bar shows the current state Context sensitive menus Within the entire screen display including single parameters you can access ...

Page 77: ... block and then the menu entry Tap the minimized view thumbnail on the taskbar Some of the utility keys access a dedicated dialog too To minimize a dialog box Tap the Minimize icon in the upper right corner To close a dialog box To close a dialog box you have the same controls as you know from computers or devices with touchscreen Perform one of the following actions Tap the Close icon in the uppe...

Page 78: ...the arrow keys move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete 2 Press the Backspace key 3 Deletes the entry to the left of the cursor 4 Enter your correction To complete the entry Press the Enter key or the rotary knob To abort the entry Press the Esc key The dialog box closes without changing the settings 3 5 5 1 Entering numeric parameters To enter values with the on screen keypad ...

Page 79: ...e the edit mode 3 5 5 2 Entering alphanumeric parameters If a field requires alphanumeric input you can use the on screen keyboard to enter let ters and special characters 3 5 5 3 Undo and redo actions Accessed via the context sensitive menus Undo allows you to restore one or more actions on the instrument Depending on the available memory the Undo steps can restore all actions Redo restores a pre...

Page 80: ...x and a Find area and Zoom functions that are accessed via the corresponding buttons To open general help Press the yellow Help key on the front panel If a dialog box is opened the help topic for the current tab is shown Otherwise the Contents page appears Navigating in the table of contents and in the help topics 1 To move through the displayed contents entries tap on an entry and scroll or use a...

Page 81: ... for remote control Connecting the instrument to a LAN see Chapter 3 1 7 Connecting to LAN on page 28 Using the LXI browser interface in a LAN Connecting a PC via the IEC bus IEEE 488 interface Remote control via the USB interface For remote control over LAN or USB you can use the R S VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture library provided for download at the Rohde Schwarz website http www ...

Page 82: ...diagram and select Key Emulation A key panel to the right of the block diagram gives access to the utility functions provi ded by the front panel keys The VNC is an add on program included in operating system Linux Unix and available as a free of charge download on the internet For more information refer to Chapter 12 10 Operating the R S SMM100A remotely using VNC on page 643 Instrument control ...

Page 83: ...tandards in accordance with the corresponding speci fications The required options are specified in the description of the respective digital standard see the corresponding user manual See also Chapter 4 3 Generating signals according to digital standards on page 85 Generating a real time signal While utilizing the internal signal generator the R S SMM100A generates the digi tal modulation signals...

Page 84: ...form files are required to simulate complex multi carrier scenarios with different baseband signals e g CDMA2000 3GPP FDD or signals in accordance with the LTE Advanced specifications See also Chapter 4 10 Generating multi carrier signals on page 230 Provided the instrument is equipped with the corresponding option it is also possible to generate multi carrier waveforms consisting of unmodulated c...

Page 85: ...SMM K40 K41 The GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution options provide functionality to generate signals in accordance with the GSM EDGE standard GSM EDGE signals comprise GMSK and 8PSK modulation and higher order modulations that are in accordance with the EDGE Evolution standard For details see the R S SMM100A GSM EDGE user manual Bluetooth Enhanced Data Rate Bluetooth 5 x This digital standard requires an ins...

Page 86: ...nality to generate signals in accordance with the TD SCDMA 3GPP TDD LCR standard For details see the R S SMM100A TD SCDMA user manual 1xEV DO Rev A and Rev B This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV DO Rev A and Rev B options R S SMM K47 K87 The 1xEV DO options provide functionality to generate signals in accordance with the CDMA2000 1xEV DO Evolution Data Optimized Rev ...

Page 87: ...n instrument equipped with the OFDM Signal Generation option R S SMM K114 This option provides functionality to generate OFDM signals and signals according to predefined OFDM modulation schemes For details see the R S SMM100A OFDM Signal Generation user manual NFC EMV This digital standard requires an instrument equipped with the NFC EMV option R S SMM K89 The NFC EVM option provides functionality...

Page 88: ...e corresponding user manual For the generation of modulation signals the instrument uses the following input sig nals Internal modulation data Clock signals Control signals Signal sources The data the clock and the trigger signals can be both internally generated and sup plied from an external source Control signals however are always generated internally Depending on the current configuration the...

Page 89: ...ces are generated with the aid of ring shift registers with feedback points determined by the polynomial The pseudo random sequence from a PRBS generator is uniquely defined by the register number and the feedback The Table 4 1 describes the available PRBS generators For PRBS15 and PRBS23 a CCITT V 52 compliant data inversion is performed in the feedback path automatically Table 4 1 Overview of PR...

Page 90: ...ig Mod Digital Standard Clock Settings Local Connectors Signal Sym bol Clock A To enable the clock source Custom Dig Mod Digital Standard Clock Settings Clock Source Internal Synchronizing data signals and clock signals The synchronization is always based on the positive edge of the clock Related settings Chapter 4 4 2 3 Clock settings on page 114 Chapter 11 2 Configuring local and global connecto...

Page 91: ...peri ods Level attenuation is applied if the Lev_Att signal is high If level attenuation is enabled the modulation signal level is attenuated by a defined value Related settings Chapter 4 5 3 6 Power ramp control settings on page 125 Possible applications Use the Level Attenuation function to simulate radio stations located at various distances Use the Power Ramp function if it is necessary to con...

Page 92: ... the falling ramp Rise fall delay offsets the falling edge of the envelope at the beginning end of a burst Figure 4 3 Impact of the ramp settings 1 Ramp Function 2 3 Rise Delay Fall Delay 4 Ramp Time 4 4 1 2 Regular marker output signals The R S SMM100A can add additional signals to the generated signal Marker signals or markers are digital signals which can be used to synchronize external devices...

Page 93: ... can be used to monitor the effects of the selected trigger e g trigger caus ing restarts of the signal generation Marker mode pulse Periodic marker with consecutive On and Off periods of equal length The first On period starts at the beginning of the first generated sample symbol The marker fre quency is defined by a Divider The frequency is derived as follows Frequency Symbol Sample Rate Divider...

Page 94: ... the examples listed in Marker modes on page 93 the marker starts at the beginning of the first generated sample symbol sample symbol no 1 It is possible though to delay the start of the marker by an integer number of symbols sample peri ods 4 4 1 3 Baseband trigger signals The R S SMM100A provides several trigger modes different trigger sources and some additional trigger settings to suppress or ...

Page 95: ...trigger signals Internal Internal Internal trigger signals are generated by the instrument itself External External Global Trigger External trigger signal is generated by an external trigger source The instrument expects the trigger signal at one of the T M C or User x connectors Refer to Configuring local and global connectors for information on how to config ure the required settings External Ba...

Page 96: ... single signal Single signal generation means that the signal generation stops after one cycle That is after the signal with signal length determined by the Trigger Signal Dura tion has been generated Continuous transmission means that the signal is generated repeatedly without delay and until the data generation is stopped explicitly However any parameter change within the processing chain baseba...

Page 97: ... to the length specified with Trigger Signal Duration Auto In auto trigger mode the instrument generates a continuous signal Figure 4 5 Trigger mode auto Retrigger The instrument generates a continuous signal With enabled retrigger a new trig ger event aborts the current generation cycle and restarts the signal generation from the beginning Common functions and settings in the baseband domain ...

Page 98: ...s the signal generation only when a trigger event occurs and then generates a continuous signal An Arm stops signal generation A subse quent trigger event causes a restart of the signal generation Figure 4 7 Trigger mode armed auto Internal trigger event to simplify the description Armed retrigger The instrument starts the signal generation only when a trigger event occurs and then generates a con...

Page 99: ...nals below the trigger threshold are ignored Trigger Input Slope Specifies the edge rising or falling edge of the trigger signal that is to provide the trigger event Impedance Trigger Input Specifies the input impedance of the trigger signal Starting the signal generation with the first sample By default the instrument starts the signal calculation simultaneously with the receiving of the external...

Page 100: ... externally supplied trigger signal This feature is useful to Simulate the time delay between a base station signal and a user equipment signal for example during base station tests Compensate for known propagation delays or a timing offset in the test setups External Trigger Inhibit You can suppress the effect of a restarted trigger signal in the Retrigger trigger mode for a definable number of s...

Page 101: ...nt configuration and related tdelay values in samples or symbols and in seconds Option Max rs MHz tdelay samples tdelay s R S SMM B9 2400 0 to depends on sample rate 0 to 458 1 For more information see the data sheet Example Trigger delay and ARB clock frequency The example is based on an ARB signal with 1 MHz clock frequency Baseband ARB Clock Frequency 1 MHz Step 1 Enable the following settings ...

Page 102: ...lity to digitally modulate the baseband signal In communication techniques commonly used digital modulation schemes are based on keying From the several existing keying techniques this instrument supports ASK amplitude shift keying FSK frequency shift keying PSK phase shift keying and QAM quadrature amplitude modulation The digital modulation procedure is described by mapping That is by the assign...

Page 103: ...e vam that can be imported into a R S SMM100A The program was developed on a 32 bit Microsoft Windows platform under MATLAB For more information see Introduction to mapwiz Mapping Editor at the Rohde Schwarz webpage The remote commands required to define the modulation settings are described in Chapter 13 16 4 2 SOURce BB DM subsystem on page 770 Related settings Chapter 4 5 3 4 Modulation setting...

Page 104: ...baseband filters User filter The user filter file must have extension vaf and can be created with the Rohde Schwarz software tool filter wizard The filter wizard filtwiz is a tool from Rohde Schwarz designed for creating filter files that can be imported on a R S SMM100A Its main purpose is the conversion of user defined finite impulse response FIR filters into the filter format vaf Beyond this fi...

Page 105: ...f a brick like filter The roll off factor affects the steepness of the filter flanks A Rolloff Factor 0 would result in the steepest theoretically possible flanks values near to 1 make the flanks more flat Passband The passband describes the frequency span that the filter passes unchanged The total passband of a filter is given as follows Bandwidth 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate Cut Off Frequency S...

Page 106: ...be linear A high crest factor arises for instance when in a multi carrier signal the carriers feature an identical start phase This is based on the fact that the carriers are periodically superposed that leads to high peak voltages in relation to the RMS voltage values High crest factors entail two basic problems The nonlinearity of the power amplifier compression causes intermodulation which expa...

Page 107: ...hnique that applies a wanted distortion to the signal The principle includes specifying a threshold finding out the signal peaks once the defined limits are exceeded and clipping them off The level limit is specified as a percentage of the highest peak value Because clipping is done before filtering the procedure does not influence the spectrum The error vector magnitude EVM however increases The ...

Page 108: ...follows a repeating dialog structure that com prises the tabs General Trigger In Marker and Clock The General tab comprises the primary settings of the standard the functions for storing and recalling settings It also provides access to further functions and dialogs like the Filter settings The Trigger In Marker and Clock tabs comprise the settings related to the corre sponding function In the fol...

Page 109: ...er settings Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Trigger In This tab comprises the settings for selecting and configuring the trigger like trigger source mode and delay and to arm or trigger an internal trigger manually The current signal generation status is displayed in the header of the tab together with information on the enabled trigger mode As in the Marker and Clock tabs this tab provi...

Page 110: ...generation for all trigger modes Running The signal is generated a trigger was internally or externally initiated in triggered mode Stopped The signal is not generated and the instrument waits for a trigger event Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger RMODe on page 784 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger RMODe on page 837 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger RMODe on page 855 Arm Stops the signal generation until...

Page 111: ...and SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 784 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 838 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 854 External Trigger Inhibit Sets the duration with that any following trigger event is suppressed In Retrigger mode for example a new trigger event does not cause a restart of the signal genera tion...

Page 112: ...lay Actual External Delay displays the delay conver ted in time Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal DELay on page 785 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal TDELay on page 786 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal DELay on page 839 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal TDELay on page 839 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal DELay on page 856 Actual Trigger Delay Actual External Delay Displ...

Page 113: ...t ch MODE on page 787 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider on page 788 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency on page 788 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern on page 788 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime on page 787 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime on page 787 ARB see Marker Mode on page 161 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE on page 857 SOURce hw ...

Page 114: ...114 Clock Source Selects the clock source Internal The instrument uses its internal clock reference See also Clock signals on page 90 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk SOURce on page 789 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk SOURce on page 843 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SOURce on page 858 4 4 2 4 Local and global connectors settings Each of the Trigger In Marker and Clock dialogs and the Trigger Marker Clo...

Page 115: ...ation methods The availa ble coding schemes listed in Chapter 4 5 5 1 Common coding algorithms on page 140 are not freely combinable with modulation methods Obviously having selected a modulation procedure not every combination of the fur ther modulation parameters Symbol Rate and Coding is possible These restrictions inevitably result in conflicting settings if you change a parameter and leads to...

Page 116: ...n page 770 Settings General settings 116 Trigger marker and clock settings 118 Data source 118 Modulation settings 121 Filter settings 123 Power ramp control settings 125 Data list editor 128 Control and marker lists editor 130 4 5 3 1 General settings Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod This tab provides access to the default and the save recall settings and to a quick selection of a digita...

Page 117: ... instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog related settings in a file The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self explanatory The settings are saved in a file with predefined extension You can define the filename and the directory in that you want to save the file See also Chapter 10 File and data management on page 483 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM SETTing...

Page 118: ...d coding schemes on page 103 The dialog shows only the coding settings that are permissible for the selected modula tion type and installed options see Table 4 8 All other coding methods are grayed out A subsequent modification to a modulation type for which the selected coding is not available automatically disables the coding Coding Off Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CODing on page 778 Power Ram...

Page 119: ...trol List 120 Connector Settings 120 Data Source Selects the data source see Chapter 4 4 1 1 Data clock and control signals and sources in the baseband on page 88 The following data sources are available All 0 All 1 A sequence containing 0 data or 1 data is internally generated PRBS PRBS Type Selects internally generated PRBS data in accordance with the IUT T Use the parameter PRBS Type to define ...

Page 120: ...St SELect on page 790 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt COPY on page 792 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DELete on page 790 Select Control List Accesses the standard Select List dialog to select an existing control list or to create a new one Control lists can be generated externally or internally in the Control and Marker Lists editor Select the Select Control List navigate to the list file dm_iqc Select to select an ...

Page 121: ...n how the settings affect the signal and the filter characteristics refer to Chapter 4 4 1 4 Suppor ted modulation signals on page 102 Settings Modulation Type 121 Load User Mapping 122 ASK Depth 122 FSK Deviation 122 Angle Alpha 122 FSK Type 122 Deviation xxxx 123 Gamma Gamma 1 123 State Modulation CW Switching 123 Modulation Type Selects a modulation type The associated symbol mapping is display...

Page 122: ... for ASK modulation m Amplitudemax Amplitudemin Amplitudemax Amplitudemin Remote command SOURce hw BB DM ASK DEPTh on page 779 FSK Deviation Sets the frequency deviation for FSK modulation The range of values depends on the selected Symbol Rate see data sheet Whenever MSK is selected the deviation corresponds to 1 4 of the symbol rate and cannot be changed Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FSK DEViat...

Page 123: ...specifica tion Remote command SOURce hw BB DM APSK16 GAMMa on page 780 SOURce hw BB DM APSK32 GAMMa on page 781 State Modulation CW Switching Enables disables switching between the digitally modulated and an unmodulated CW signal Remote command SOURce hw BB DM SWITching STATe on page 781 4 5 3 5 Filter settings Access Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Filter This tab provides access to the filter...

Page 124: ...r The filter parameter offered Rolloff Factor or BxT depends on the currently selected filter type Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25 on page 777 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine ROLLoff on page 777 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter GAUSs on page 777 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter PGAuss on page 777 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter RCOSine on page 777 SOURce hw BB DM FI...

Page 125: ...or f 1 rolloff bandwidth 2 Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine BANDwidth on page 777 Load User Filter Calls the dialog Select User Filter for selecting a user defined filter file with extension vaf see User filter on page 104 The dialog provides access to the standard file management functions like save load delete Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FLISt SELect on page 790 SOURce h...

Page 126: ...uation on page 91 Power ramping is possible up to a symbol rate of 5 MHz A higher symbol rate disables the power ramping automatically and an error message is output Settings State 126 Source 126 Ramp Function 127 Ramp Time 127 Rise Delay 127 Fall Delay 127 Attenuation 127 In Baseband Only 127 State Enables disables power ramping Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp STATe on page 783 Source Define...

Page 127: ...82 Rise Delay Sets the offset in the rising edge of the envelope at the start of a burst see Figure 4 3 A positive value delays the envelope length decreases and a negative value causes an advance the envelope length increases The setting is expressed in symbols Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp RDELay on page 782 Fall Delay Sets the offset in the falling edge of the envelope at the end of a bu...

Page 128: ...ents when one baseband signal is applied to two RF paths Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp BBONly STATe on page 783 4 5 3 7 Data list editor The R S SMM100A provides the following ways to create a data list file To use the dedicated Data List Editor and create a file with extension dm_iqd see To create data lists manually on page 136 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file se...

Page 129: ...of the list On the left edge of the editor the last three offset positions are specified at the beginning of the row An existing list can be edited in the insert or replace mode The upper right corner shows the current mode SCPI command SOURce hw BB DM DLISt SELect on page 790 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA on page 794 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA APPend on page 795 The buttons below the binary list sim...

Page 130: ...0A provides the following ways to create a file containing control sig nals To use the tag oriented format and create a control list file see To create a control list using tag file format on page 173 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create a control list in binary format on page 174 To use the dedicated Control Data Editor and create a file in ASCII format and with e...

Page 131: ...efine the ramp for the individual markers or control signals tap on the desired position or use the provided support functions Signal Table and Cursor Position To simplify the settings use the predefined preset ramp charac teristics in the Signal Preset Type section The scaling of the x axis is always adapted to the overall length of the control list to provide constant overview of all defined ram...

Page 132: ...Total List Length Enters the length of the definition range of the control list in bits The starting value is always bit 0 The entire definition range is displayed i e the bit scale is adapted to the entry If the definition range is decreased the ramps outside the range are lost When used the control list is always repeated over the length of the definition range if the length of the data list exc...

Page 133: ...ignal Select Edit to access a dialog with representation of the ramps of the selected sig nal in table form The bit position is specified in the Ramp Position column the high or low signal sta tus in the Ramp State column Use the last blank row to enter new ramps To apply the changes press Accept Remote command n a Zoom Visible Zooms the displayed area of the control list The designation of the bu...

Page 134: ...ge 173 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create a control list in binary format on page 174 To create a control list in ASCII format manually Use the intuitive build in Control and marker lists editor dialog 1 To open the Control Data Editor a Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Data Source Select Control List b Select an existing file or select New If the selected file...

Page 135: ...marker and or other con trol signals Enabled control signals are indicated as active in the Configure Control Signal section How to assign and activate control signals from a control list Irrespectively on the way they are created generated control lists are not automatically used To use a marker control signal from a control list and to output this signal at the suppor ted connector perform the f...

Page 136: ... a Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Data Source Data List b Select Select Data List c Navigate to the required directory for example var user Select New and enter File Name dl The Data List Editor opens the data list is empty 2 Enter a sequence of 0 and 1 for example 01110101 Figure 4 11 Example of data list 3 Select Save to save the used settings as a data list file The instrument saves the dl ...

Page 137: ...fected Data Source PRBS 9 Standard GSM Symbol Rate 270 833 ksymb s Coding GSM Modulation Type MSK Filter Gauss FSK Filter parameter B T 0 3 Trigger Mode Auto Source Internal Clock Source Internal Power Ramp Control settings Attenuation 15 0 dB Ramp Time 1 00 sym Ramp Function Cosine Rise Delay 0 00 sym Fall Delay 0 00 sym Source Internal State Off Table 4 6 Communication standards with their prede...

Page 138: ...k Bluetooth 2FSK Deviation 160 0 kHz 1 0 Msym s Gauss B T 0 5 Off BLUetooth DECT 2FSK Deviation 288 0 kHz 1 152 Msym s Gauss B T 0 5 Off DECT ETC ARIB STD T55 ASK ASK Depth 100 1 024 Msym s Split Phase B T 2 0 Off ETC GSM MSK 270 833333 ksym s Gauss B T 0 3 GSM GSM GSM EDGE 8PSK EDGE 3pi 8 8PSK 270 833333 ksym s Gauss linear Off GSMEdge NADC pi 4 DQPSK 24 3 ksym s Root cosine alpha 0 35 NADC NADC ...

Page 139: ...a2000 VDL APCO2 5 FSK APCO25 8PSK ASK X X X X BPSK X X X X pi 2 DBPSK X X QPSK X X X X X QPSK EDGE X QPSK45 Off set X X X X Pi 4 QPSK X X X Pi 4 DQPSK X X X X 8PSK X X X X X AQPSK X X X X OQPSK X X X X 8PSK_EDGE X Pi 8 D8PSK X X X MSK X X X X X 2FSK X X X X X 4FSK X X X X X 8FSK X X X X 16FSK X X X X 32FSK X 64FSK X 16QAM X X X X X 16QAM EDGE X 32QAM X X X X X 32QAM EDGE X 64QAM X X X X X 128QAM X...

Page 140: ...listed in Table 4 8 Table 4 8 Common coding algorithms Coding Coding algorithm Applicable for K bit symbol None bn an k 1 8 Differential bn an b 1 modulo 2k k 1 7 Differential Gray Gray coding with additional differential coding k 1 7 Phase Differential b1n NOT a1n EXOR a0n AND a1n EXOR b1 n 1 OR a1n EXOR a0n AND a1n EXOR b0 n 1 b0n NOT a1n EXOR a0n AND a0n EXOR b0 n 1 OR a1n EXOR a0 n 1 AND a0n E...

Page 141: ... is similar to that of 8PSK Phase shifts are however assigned to the individual modulation symbols The Table 4 10 shows the assignment of modula tion symbols an binary indication MSB LSB to phase shifts of the I Q vector in rela tion to the selected coding Table 4 10 Phase shifts for pi 4DQPSK Modulation symbol an 00 01 10 11 Coding Off 45 135 135 45 Coding NADC PDC PHS TETRA or APCO25 PSK 45 135 ...

Page 142: ...ers that are available together with their associated parameters The filter characteristic is displayed in graphical form Table 4 12 Overview of the baseband filters Raised Cosine RC Roll Off Factor Root Raised Cosine RRC Roll Off Factor Gauss FSK B T Gauss Pure B T Gauss Linearized Edge Narrow Pulse Shape Generating custom digital modulated signals ...

Page 143: ...Configuring the internal baseband source R S SMM100A 143 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 Edge Wide Pulse Shape cdmaOne cdmaOne 705kHz cdmaOne Equalizer Generating custom digital modulated signals ...

Page 144: ...Configuring the internal baseband source R S SMM100A 144 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 cdmaOne 705kHz Equalizer cdma2000 3X APCO25 Roll Off Factor APCO25 H CPM Generating custom digital modulated signals ...

Page 145: ... the internal baseband source R S SMM100A 145 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 APCO25 LSM Gauss Cut Off Frequency Lowpass Cut Off Frequency Split Phase B T Rectangular Dirac Generating custom digital modulated signals ...

Page 146: ...Configuring the internal baseband source R S SMM100A 146 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 Lowpass ACP optim Lowpass EVM optim Generating custom digital modulated signals ...

Page 147: ...or processing of waveform files includes Option Baseband Generator R S SMM B9 Corresponding digital standard option R S SMM K2xx K4xx Required to process a waveform file generated by the signal generation software R S WinIQSIM2 For example if you purchase option Digital Standard EUTRA LTE R S SMM K255 you can process EUTRA LTE waveform files generated by R S WinIQSIM2 Optional ARB memory extension...

Page 148: ...e header of the generated I Q data files consists of tags which are enclosed in braces For detailed description on all available tags and for information on how to query them or to create waveforms manually refer to Chapter 4 6 5 Tags for waveforms data and control lists on page 177 Waveform file sources Depending on whether the R S SMM100A creates the waveform files itself or not the following wa...

Page 149: ...ormat on page 175 Chapter 4 6 4 9 Editing waveform files data and control lists on page 176 4 6 2 2 ARB test signals The following test signals are available Sine test signal Two sinewave signals with a selectable but equal number of samples per period and equal frequencies When the generation is triggered the number of samples per period together with the frequency of the test signal deter mine t...

Page 150: ...d constant clock frequency of 10 kHz The values for each I and Q components are selectable but constant They are defined as a decimal number which is decimal to binary converted internally The signal is provided as a 16 bit wide digital signal for both I and Q channels You can output the signal directly at the BNC connectors I and Q outputs of the instrument AWGN test signal Requires option R S SM...

Page 151: ...65 An externally created waveform file has to provide a sample rate finput that is high enough for perfect signal reconstruction For distortion free resampling the lower bound of the required sample rate finput is then calculated as follows finput Usable_Bandwidth b Thus a modulation signal with a sample rate finput 600 MHz fed in the baseband gen erator ensures the Usable_Bandwidthmax After the D...

Page 152: ...ry size per complex sample 32 bits 4 bits 36 bits 4 5 bytes where The raw I Q samples are saved as 16 bit values That is for I Q data 2 x 16 bits 32 bits 16 bits per I Q channel Each software defined marker requires 1 bit That is for 4 enabled markers 4 x 1 bit 4 bits Maximum waveform length with 3 markers 512 MB 4 5 bytes 113 Msamples Theoretical maximum waveform length no markers 512 MB 4 bytes ...

Page 153: ...o settings for configuring the test signal and access to the settings for calculating a multi segment or a multi carrier waveform If a multi segment waveform is loaded the tab expands and displays the dedicated section Multi Segment Waveform Options This section comprises the settings necessary to configure the segment to be out put and adjust the trigger for the switch between the segments of the...

Page 154: ... ARB generator cannot be activated You cannot activate the ARB generator in the following cases No or empty waveform file If no waveform file is loaded as in the default state None is displayed next to Load Waveform An error message indicates that no or empty waveform file is selected Select a waveform file before switching on the ARB Missing burst gate marker in the waveform but RF Power Ramping ...

Page 155: ... and process the selected waveform file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform SELect on page 810 Waveform Info Opens a dialog with detailed information about the currently selected waveform The display depends on whether the selected waveform file is a multisegment one or not All parameters are read only Remote command For non multi segment waveform files use the Tag commands see Chapter ...

Page 156: ...itrary PRAMp STATe on page 805 Create Multi Segment Accesses the dialog for creating multi segment waveforms see Chapter 4 9 Generat ing multi segment waveform files on page 200 Create Multi Carrier Accesses the dialog for creating multi carrier waveforms see Chapter 4 10 Generat ing multi carrier signals on page 230 Test Signal Form Selects the form of the test signal A choice between a sinusoida...

Page 157: ...st signals on page 149 The dialog displays the characteristic of the currently selected signal Settings Frequency 157 Samples per Period 157 Phase Offset Q 158 Generate Signal File 158 Generate Signal RAM 158 Frequency Enters the frequency of the test signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency on page 807 Samples per Period Enters the number of sample values required from ...

Page 158: ...Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses this signal as output straight away The instrument saves the file using a predefined filename Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate on page 808 4 6 3 3 Rectangular test signal Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Test Signal Form Rect 2 Select Create Test Signal This dialog provides settings for configuration of a rectangular test signal A...

Page 159: ...the rectangular wave The abbreviation FS means full scale Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle AMPLitude on page 806 Offset DC Enters a DC component Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle OFFSet on page 807 Generate Signal File Generates a signal and saves it as a waveform file on the hard disk Use the standard File Select function to save the file Remote comman...

Page 160: ...te command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ I on page 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ Q on page 806 Generate Signal File Generates a signal and saves it as a waveform file on the hard disk Use the standard File Select function to save the file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate NAMed on page 808 Generate Signal RAM Generates a signal and uses this signal as output st...

Page 161: ...arkers See Regular marker output signals for description of the regular marker signals Note The marker trace in the waveform file remains unchanged in any case It is not overwritten even if something else than Unchanged has been selected The instrument routes the generated marker signals to the selected output connectors See also Chapter 11 2 Configuring local and global connectors on page 527 Unc...

Page 162: ...ter 4 6 4 4 How to use waveform files with R S WinIQSIM2 on page 164 With the software R S ARB Toolbox Calculated using a mathematical program such as MATLAB see Chap ter 4 6 4 5 How to manually create a waveform using tag file format on page 167 Provided the R S SMM100A is equipped with the required option you can load this waveform file and subsequent process it with the instrument This section ...

Page 163: ... Generate Waveform File A standard file select dialog opens a Navigate to the directory in that you want to save the file e g var user b Enter a filename e g lte_waveform c Click Save The R S SMM100A saves the generated waveform file lte_waveform wv under the selected directory var user To process the waveform file load it in the ARB see Chapter 4 6 4 3 How to load and play waveform files on page ...

Page 164: ...ith the R S WinIQSIM2 refer to description R S WinIQSIM2 User Manual To define the R S SMM100A as destination instrument In this example we assume that the R S WinIQSIM2 is installed on a remote control ler This remote controller is connected over LAN to the R S SMM100A The general instrument settings of the destination instrument affect various functions like the maximum size of the file the wave...

Page 165: ...SMM100A is established To generate a waveform file with R S WinIQSIM2 1 In the block diagram of R S WinIQSIM2 select Baseband EUTRA LTE IoT 2 Adjust the settings as required for example a Select Link Direction Downlink OFDMA b Select a predefined test model for example Test Models E TM1_1__10MHz 3 Enable EUTRA LTE IoT State On The R S WinIQSIM2 calculates the signal and displays important signal p...

Page 166: ...ile to the R S SMM100A 1 In the R S WinIQSIM2 select Transmission Transmit 2 In the Waveform Transmission to Arbitrary Waveform Generator dialog select a Transmit from Internal WinIQSIM2 b Transmit to Instrument c Select File d Define the filename of the transmitted file e Activate Automatically Load and Start Waveform f Select the required baseband for example Path A g Add a comment to the wavefo...

Page 167: ...example uses a short program written in the pro gramming language C to calculate the sine and cosine values see Example C pro gram for creating a waveform file on page 170 They are saved in the file SICO txt The decimal values in SICO txt are normalized such that they are between 1 0 and 1 0 The data is converted into binary format The appropriate mandatory tags are added and the data is packed in...

Page 168: ...SICO cpp program The result is saved in the file SICO txt Figure 4 14 Contents of SICO txt first column Sine I second column Cosine Q 2 Convert the values from the file SICO txt into binary format consisting of 16 bit signed integer numbers The numeric range between 1 0 and 1 0 corresponds to the modulation range of the waveform 16 bit D A converter of 32767 to 32767 1 0 32767 0x7FFF 0 0 0 0x0000 ...

Page 169: ...8E27BB79 72D8BB79 To simplify the example the checksum is set to 0 i e the instrument does not eval uate a checksum Tip The tags TYPE CLOCK LEVEL OFFS and WAVEFORM are mandatory for each waveform All other tags are optional and can be inserted after the TYPE tag in arbitrary order 4 Pack the binary data into a WAVEFORM tag with the described structure WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1I2Q2 InQn Calculate th...

Page 170: ...containing 20 sine and cosine pairs converting them into binary data and creating the waveform file SICO wv SICO cpp Defines the entry point for the console application include stdafx h include stdlib h include stdio h include math h int _tmain int argc _TCHAR argv const unsigned int samples 20 const float pi 3 141592654f int i SICO txt Creating the file SICO txt containing 20 sine and cosine pair...

Page 171: ... d samples 4 1 for i 0 i samples i Read I Q pair from ASCII file if fscanf fp_sour f f i_float q_float EOF break Convert I Q pair to unsigned short i_usint unsigned short floor i_float 32767 0 0 5 q_usint unsigned short floor q_float 32767 0 0 5 Write converted I Q pair to waveform file fwrite i_usint 2 1 fp_dest fwrite q_usint 2 1 fp_dest fprintf fp_dest fclose fp_dest fclose fp_sour return 0 4 6...

Page 172: ...L LENGTH tag is not used To define a restart marker and a frame start marker use the following tags 1 The waveform is 300 samples long i e set SAMPLES 300 2 Set two TRACE LIST tags For Marker 1 that acts as a restart marker MARKER LIST 1 0 1 10 0 299 0 For Marker 2 that marks each frame start MARKER LIST 2 0 1 10 0 99 0 3 Do not use the CONTROL LENGTH tag The length of the repeated patterns is det...

Page 173: ...Data Editor and create a file in ASCII format and with extension dm_iqc see To create a control list in ASCII format manually on page 134 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file see To create a data list file using tag file format on page 175 To use SCPI commands and create a file in binary format see To create a data list in binary format on page 176 To create a control list us...

Page 174: ...ated control list in the Control Data Editor Compare the displayed ramp values of Marker 1 and the Total List Length with the values in the corresponding tags Note In the provided example the tags have been separated by line breaks for better reading See also Example How to assign and activate control signals from a control list on page 175 To create a control list in binary format Generation of a...

Page 175: ...ate a data list using tag file format The R S SMM100A provides the following ways to create a data list file To use the dedicated Data List Editor and create a file with extension dm_iqd see To create data lists manually on page 136 To use the tag oriented format and create a data list file see To create a data list file using tag file format on page 175 To use SCPI commands and create a file in b...

Page 176: ...r user The following example shows how to enable the R S SMM100A to use this data list as data source for the custom digital modulation MMEM CDIRectory var user SOURce1 BB DM DLISt CATalog Response dl SOURce1 BB DM DLISt SELect dl 4 6 4 9 Editing waveform files data and control lists You can edit the internally and externally crated waveform files data and control lists The waveform data and contr...

Page 177: ... in a WAVEFORM tag DATA LIST tag or EMPTYTAG Length is an ASCII integer value defining the number of bytes from the colon to the end brace Rules Each waveform file must begin with the TYPE tag The sequence of the remaining tags is arbitrary For each tag an indication shows whether it must be included in the file concerned mandatory or may be included optional Unknown tags are not analyzed by the R...

Page 178: ... must be the first in the waveform If a file of the same name exists on the target medium it is overwrit ten Setting parameters magic Designates the file type and has the following values SMU WV A valid R S SMM100A waveform SMU MWV A valid R S SMM100A multi segment waveform SMU DL A valid R S SMM100A data list SMU CL A valid R S SMM100A control list xxxxxxxx Is an ASCII coded checksum of the data ...

Page 179: ...ble ASCII characters except the closing curly bracket Example COMMENT File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels BB ARB WAV TAG COMMENT Queries the content of the COMMENT tag of the selected wave form file Response File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels The comment on the waveform reads File with data for 3GPP enhanced channels Usage Setting only COPYRIGHT string The tag contains an ASCII string...

Page 180: ...ODE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 HOP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 LEVATT LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 MAP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 MARKER LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 TRACE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1 IxQx IN 1QN 1 185 MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT NumOfSeg 186 ...

Page 181: ...ag specifies the length of all control or marker list in ASCII format The control length influences the way the marker and control lists are processed in particular the way traces are repeated see Figure 4 18 Figure 4 18 Example Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONTROL LENGHT is specified If the CONTROL LENGTH tag is not used the marker and control list length are deter mined by the last position tha...

Page 182: ... of newly introduced bytes EmptySequence An empty sequence containing blanks only The number of used blanks is calculated as the difference between the hex addresses of the WAVEFORM tag and the hash sign in the EMPTYTAG The WAVEFORM tag always starts at hex address 4000 Example TYPE SMU WV 837236424 COPYRIGHT 2003 Rohde Schwarz SMU DATE 2012 07 11 14 38 01 SAMPLES 80000 CLOCK 8666666 666666666 VEC...

Page 183: ...rt I2 Q2 max 215 1 32767 A positive PeakOffset_dB value indicates that a headroom to full scale is provided when generating the waveform A negative PeakOffset_dB value indicates that overrange is likely for some samples i e clipping might occur The crest factor can be calculated from the two values as fol lows Crest Factor PeakOffset_dB RMSOffset_dB Example LEVEL OFFS 3 45 2 BB ARB WAV TAG LEVEL O...

Page 184: ...total I Q samples of all segments Example SAMPLES 1000 BB ARB WAV TAG SAMPLES Queries the content of the SAMPLES tag of the selected wave form file Response 1000 The waveform contains 1000 I Q samples Usage Setting only See also Chapter 4 6 4 6 How to define periodically repeating traces on page 171 BURST LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 CW MODE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 Stat...

Page 185: ... of marker states is 64 i e Pos63 State63 State 0 1 Specifies the binary state of the marker or of the control signal from PosN to PosN 1 exclusive in ASCII format Example MARKER LIST 1 0 0 10 1 20 0 30 1 BB DM CLIS TAG MARKER LIST 1 Queries the content of the MARKER LIST 1 tag of the selected control list file Response 0 0 10 1 20 0 30 1 The marker setting for samples 0 to 9 0 low for 10 to 19 1 ...

Page 186: ...e collectively waveform I Q stream The number of segments and the start offset and length of the individual segments inside the total waveform I Q stream is determined by the additional tags MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT MWV_SEGMENT_START and MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH Further MWV_SEGMENT_ tags are also available for example for level and clock information Example One segment waveform WAVEFORM 401 I0 Q0 I1 Q1 I2 Q2 I...

Page 187: ...t 0 and 200 samples in seg ment 1 Usage Setting only MWV_SEGMENT_START SampleStartOffsetSeg0 SampleStartOffsetSeg1 SampleStartOffsetSegN 1 mandatory for multi segment waveforms The tag contains a list of I Q sample start offsets for every segment in the multi seg ment waveform in ASCII integer format Example MWV_SEGMENT_START 0 100 2 segments with 100 samples in segment 0 and 200 samples in segmen...

Page 188: ...n ASCII floating point format Example MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK 100e6 80e6 2 segments clock of segment 0 is 100 MHz clock of segment 1 is 80 MHz Note If the segments have different clock frequencies there are some restrictions on signal output i e seamless switching between segments is only possible if all segments have the same clock frequency Software resampling upsampling can be used to bring all segme...

Page 189: ...s the same as in the LEVEL OFFS tag for normal waveforms Example MWV_SEGMENT_LEVEL_OFFS 3 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 segments RMS level of segment 0 is 3 dB below full scale RMS level of segment 1 is 6dB below full scale Peak level of both segments is 0 dB full scale Usage Setting only MWV_SEGMENT_SETTINGS_FILE SegSettingFilePath optional for multi segment waveforms The tag contains the file path and filenam...

Page 190: ...e number of I Q samples The CONTROL LENGTH tag has to contain the number of all marker elements m Figure 4 20 Marker element in 4 bit binary format bit order For standard waveforms the MARKER LIST x tags are a more compact way to define markers In principle however the CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 format can also be used instead of the MARKER LIST x tags For multi segment waveforms the CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 ...

Page 191: ...1 mandatory for data lists The tag contains the actual bit sequence of the data list in binary format Setting parameters Length Defines the number of bytes in the DATA LIST tag in ASCII Format see WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1 IxQx IN 1QN 1 for details dx Data bits in binary format 8 bit unsigned characters MSB first Example DATA LIST 17 d0d1 dx d127 16 bytes containing 128 data bits first bit is the M...

Page 192: ...ontrol list length are deter mined by the last position that is the last Pos State couple defined in the particular TRACE LIST tag see Figure 4 19 Figure 4 22 Example Processing of MARKER TRACE if CONTROL LENGHT is not used To maintain marker signals and waveform data synchronized set the CONTROL LENGTH to be equal to the number of samples specified with the tag SAMPLES See also Chapter 4 6 4 6 Ho...

Page 193: ...e ignored 1 to 3 Sets the marker or control trace number supported is only LEVATT LIST 1 Pos Specifies in ASCII format the position i e sample number or data value with effect from which the binary State of the marker or of the control signal changes If the tag MARKER MODE is used the maximum number of marker states is 64 i e Pos63 State63 State 0 1 Specifies the binary state of the marker or of t...

Page 194: ... OFDM Signal Generation R S SMM K114 Frequency option e g R S SMM B1006 For more information see data sheet 4 7 2 About the notch filters The noise power ratio NPR measurement is a method for evaluating the linearity of wideband amplifiers The NPR measurement use notched filters that are applied on internally or externally created waveforms The R S SMM100A equipped with the R S SMM K811 option all...

Page 195: ... their settings a Number of Notches e g 3 b For notch 1 set Frequency Offset 0 and Notch Bandwidth MHz 0 6 c For notch 1 set State On 5 Select Notch Filter Apply to trigger the instrument to adopt the notch filter set tings 6 Select ARB General State On Comprises the settings for enabling the notch filter and indicates the clock fre quency for the waveform The remote commands required to define th...

Page 196: ...Rce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh on page 833 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh on page 833 Clock Frequency Indicates the current clock frequency of the waveform signal The value resambles the value set with the parameter ARB General Clock Fre quency Notch Bandwidth is related to this value Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh CLOCk on page 833 etc for the corresponding option SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh CLOCk on p...

Page 197: ...4 etc for the corresponding option SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch FREQuency OFFSet on page 834 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh ch FREQuency OFFSet on page 834 Notch Bandwidth MHz Notch definition table Sets the absolute notch bandwidth The selected value is adjusted to the internal frequency grid The maximum notch bandwidth is calculated as Clock Frequency 10 Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch BW...

Page 198: ...bed in Chap ter 13 16 4 3 SOURce BB ARBitrary subsystem on page 795 To generate an AWGN test signal 1 Select Test Signal Form AWGN 2 Click Create Test Signal The dialog AWGN Test SIgnal opens Optionally adjust the number of samples of the test signal 3 Click Generate Signal RAM A test signal waveform file is created with the set number of samples 4 Close the dialog The waveform file is loaded to t...

Page 199: ...e bandwidth of the resulting noise signal is approximately 0 96 fclock Example A clock frequency fclock of 100 MHz results in a noise signal bandwidth of about 0 96 fclock 96 MHz 7 Select ARB State On and RF On The R S SMM100A processes the waveform file and generates an AWGN signal Settings Samples 199 Generate Signal RAM 200 Samples Sets the number of samples generated for the AWGN waveform Gene...

Page 200: ...ification and test requirements To fulfill the requirements of these test systems and to enable rapid alternation between different waveforms with differing test signals the R S SMM100A provides the functionality to generate multi segment waveform files This section introduces the concept of the multi segment waveform files together with description of the provided settings and some typical config...

Page 201: ...e segment intended to be output at any given moment When the created waveform is loaded the graphical interface displays information on clock rate number of samples and creation day You can also acquire information about the waveform in the dedicated Waveform Info dialog 4 9 2 2 ARB sequencer mode If high switch over speeds is required the test signals can be continuously scrolled through with the...

Page 202: ...o but independent from the multi segment file By default both files have the same name and are located in the same file directory You can create more than one sequencing list file per multi segment waveform file The sequencing list file carries information only about the segment number the corresponding waveform filenames are retrieved from the assigned multi segment waveform file That is the same...

Page 203: ...s of the different marker signals if multiple marker signals are mapped to the same connector Figure 4 25 Marker priority used by assigning of marker signals to a hardware connector 4 9 2 5 Impact of the trigger settings and next segment settings The ARB dialog is equipped with the standard regular trigger settings These settings are provided for triggering of the composed multi segment waveform a...

Page 204: ...next segment trigger events can be used to cyclically output the segments in the multi segment file Defining the Next Segment Source As with the standard trigger system provided are the following two sources for the next segment signal Internal the switch over to the subsequent segment is triggered manually with the Execute Next Segment function To trigger a switch over to any segment within the m...

Page 205: ...enerate a multi segment signal without signal gaps between the segments is to use the provided ARB sequencer mode see Chapter 4 9 3 4 Multi segment waveform sequencing on page 214 The Table 4 14 shows two examples of the transition from a sine wave signal segment to a sawtooth segment I channel upper curve in the case of next segment external triggering The left graphic displays an abrupt transiti...

Page 206: ...ti Segment dialog enables direct assignment of waveforms to the multiple segments adjusting the clock level and marker settings of the composed waveform and selecting the output file For description on the provided settings refer to Chapter 4 9 3 1 Setting for handling the multi segment files and output file set tings on page 207 Chapter 4 9 3 2 Segment table on page 209 and Chapter 4 9 3 3 Level ...

Page 207: ...itrary subsystem on page 795 Setting for handling the multi segment files and output file settings 207 Segment table 209 Level clock marker settings 212 Multi segment waveform sequencing 214 Multi segment waveform trigger settings 218 4 9 3 1 Setting for handling the multi segment files and output file settings Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Create Multi Segment The General tab comprises sta...

Page 208: ...ent entries of the Segment table in a configuration list file including the level mode clock mode segment marker mode and output filename settings See also Chapter 4 9 2 3 File concept on page 202 Consider also the following remote control commands To define the configuration file inf_mswv used by the calculation of the output file SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEG...

Page 209: ...entries in the Segment table Create and Load Creates a multi segment waveform and loads it in the ARB generator The R S SMM100A stores the multi carrier waveform as file with filename as specified with parameter Output file Depending on the configuration of the multi carrier waveform calculation takes some time Use the Abort function to interrupt the calculation Remote command To define the config...

Page 210: ...ts is retrieved from the tags of the corre sponding waveform files Segment Indication of segment index Within the manual and remote control configuration this segment index indicates the segment explicitly Tip Use the segment index for example to define the subsequent sequence to be output in Next Segment Mode Next Segment or Next Segment Seamless Waveform Indication of the waveform filename of th...

Page 211: ...n Rearranges the segments i e moves the selected segment up and down Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend on page 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete on page 820 Blank Segment Comprises the settings of a blank segment A blank segment is a zero signal with defined clock rate and number of samples Clock Rate Selects the clock rate of the blank segm...

Page 212: ...ment Marker 213 Sequence Restart 213 Segment Restart 214 Level Defines the way the instrument determines the output level of each of the multiple waveforms Unchanged Concerning the level settings the segments are output exactly as defined in the individual files The Level display applies only to the segment with the highest RMS value Sometimes the remaining seg ments are output at a lower level th...

Page 213: ...hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk on page 819 Segment Marker Defines the way the marker information within the separate segments is processed see also Chapter 4 9 2 4 Impact of the marker settings on page 202 Ignore The marker information carried in the individual segment waveform files is not considered Take Over The output waveform file contains the marker information as config ured in th...

Page 214: ... between two segments and if there is a segment replay Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer ESEGment on page 817 4 9 3 4 Multi segment waveform sequencing Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Create Multi Segment 2 In the ARB Multi Segment General dialog select an existing list 3 Select ARB Multi Segment Segment Table and configure a waveform with more than one segment 4...

Page 215: ... provided settings 10 Select ARB Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing General Save to store the play list 11 Select ARB Multi Segment General Create and Load Output File to store and load current multi segment file 12 To enable the instrument to use the configured play list select ARB Next Seg ment Waveform Options Next Segment Mode Sequencer All segments in a play list must have the same clock rate ...

Page 216: ...es of the table in a play list file Play list files have the file exten sion wvs The default filename of the play list file is the same as the multi segment waveform file name but it can be changed Sequencing List Displays the name of the selected sequencing list file i e the file with the play list set tings see Chapter 4 9 2 3 File concept on page 202 Remote command n a Assigned to Multi Seg Wav...

Page 217: ...quencing list file carries information only about the segment index the corresponding filenames are retrieved form the assigned multi segment waveform file Waveform Indicates the waveform file mapped to the corresponding segment The filename is retrieved form the assigned multi segment waveform file Available are only waveform files from the pool of segments of the selected multi segment waveform ...

Page 218: ...t to be processed next This feature is limited to the first 32 rows Append Sequencing Play List Inserts a new row at the end of the sequencing play list table Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence SELect on page 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence APPend on page 816 Delete Sequencing Play List Deletes the selected row Shift Id Up Down Sequencing Play List Rearranges the ...

Page 219: ... 221 Sequencing List 221 Trigger Example 221 Current Segment Current Segment Index Indicates the waveform segment segment filename and index that is output Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment on page 813 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NAME on page 814 Segment Selects the waveform segment to be output after the segment indicated as Current Segment This parameter determines the start seg...

Page 220: ...how the regular trigger signal affects the multi segment waveform processing in combination with the different values for Next Segment Mode refer to Chapter 4 9 5 Reference to triggering of multi segment waveforms on page 227 Note The seamless switch over and the sequencer mode require segments with equal sample rate Same Segment The processing of the multi segment waveform file is similar to the ...

Page 221: ...ment is output with the crest factor defined in its waveform file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe on page 815 Execute Next Segment For Next Segment Source Internal triggers manually switch over to the subsequent segment in the multi segment file The subsequent segment can be any segment within the multi segment file and is defined by the parameter Segment This parameter is dis...

Page 222: ...rkflow for generation of multi segment waveforms Generating a multi segment waveform file basic workflow 1 In the ARB Create Multi Segment General dialog select New List to create an empty list 2 Use the ARB Multi Segment Segment Table Append function to add two or more waveform files 3 In the ARB Multi Segment Level Clock Marker dialog adjust the Level Clock and Segment Marker settings 4 Select t...

Page 223: ...t test signals it may be necessary to switch dynami cally and flexibly between any of the test signals for instance depending on the out come of the previous test The following settings enable flexible dynamic switch over between the segments in a multi segment waveform We assume that a multi segment sequence composed of 4 segments Seg 0 Seg 1 Seg 2 and Seg 3 is created and loaded in the ARB see G...

Page 224: ...al computer the following settings enable switching times of approx 20 ms for segments with the same sample rate and approx 200 ms for segments with different sample rates ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Mode Next Segment ARB Trigger In Trigger Mode Auto ARB Trigger In Trigger Source Internal To generate a multi segment signal without signal interruptions Testing receivers requires a continuous ou...

Page 225: ...onfigured The following settings enable switching times of approx 5 us and the test signals are scrolled through with the aid of an external trigger signal 1 Select ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Mode Next Segment 2 Select ARB Trigger In MSW Next Segment Source External Global Next Segment 1 3 Do not change the displayed segment index parameter ARB Trigger In MSW Segment 4 Enable ARB Trigger Trig...

Page 226: ...RB sequencing function 1 In the ARB Multi Segment dialog load the previously created list and execute Create and Load 2 Select ARB Multi Segment General Sequencing List The Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing dialog opens A new play list is cre ated and assigned to the current multi segment waveform file 3 Select ARB Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing Sequencing Play List and use the Append function ...

Page 227: ...rker delay settings 2 Select the Block Diagram Trigger Marker Clock and map the Logical Signals Marker 1 Marker 2 to the desired connectors Global Connectors User x Direction Output and Signal Baseband Marker 1 Baseband Marker 2 3 In the ARB Multi Segment Level Clock Marker dialog select Segment Marker Ignore 4 Enable Level Clock Marker Sequence Restart Marker 1 5 Enable Level Clock Marker Segment...

Page 228: ... until a trigger occurs Single Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated once Fur ther trigger events cause a restart If the segment is changed in Segment signal output is not stopped The new segment is not output until a trigger occurs 4 9 5 2 Triggering in Next trigger mode next segment Depending on the trigger setting the segment selected under Segment is output ...

Page 229: ...ger event switches over to outputting the subsequent segment following a system imposed signal gap If the segment is changed in Segment signal output is stopped and the new seg ment is not output until a trigger occurs The subsequent trigger event after the last segment causes the first segment to be output again Single Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated once...

Page 230: ...Trigger Mode Description Armed_Auto Output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated continu ously Each trigger event re starts the segment each next segment trigger event switches over to outputting the subsequent segment once the output of the current segment has been completed If the segment is changed in Segment signal output is stopped and the new seg ment is not outp...

Page 231: ...ated before it is loaded to and played by the ARB The R S SMM100A saves the created multi carrier waveform file under user definable name as with the single carrier waveforms the used file extension is wv The instru ment appends additional information to the header of the composed waveform file When the created waveform is loaded the graphical interface displays information on clock rate number of...

Page 232: ... written in the waveform file 4 10 2 1 Defining the carrier frequency There are two ways to define the carrier frequency of the individual carriers in the mul ticarrier signal Enabling the arbitrary carrier frequency distribution and specifying the carrier fre quency of each carrier individually Using the built in equidistant carrier spacing distribution function That is enabling the carriers to b...

Page 233: ...actor Target crest factor determines the target crest factor A value above the crest factor of the unclipped multicarrier signal has no effect Filter cut off frequency determines the filter parameter of the final lowpass filter When the cutoff frequency is set as half of the output sample rate a final lowpass filter improves the spectrum of the clipped multicarrier signal However it can also incre...

Page 234: ...g the genera tion and the configuration of the carrier distribution Settings Set to Default 235 Save Recall Frame 235 Mode 235 Number of Carriers 235 Carrier Spacing 236 Crest Factor Mode 236 Clipping 236 Target Crest Factor 236 Filter Cutoff Frequency 236 Signal Period Mode 237 Signal Period 237 Power Reference 237 Output Settings 239 Output File 239 Clock Rate 239 File Size 239 Create Create and...

Page 235: ...e carriers are distributed within the available bandwidth Equidistant Carrier Spacing Sets an equidistant carrier spacing distribution i e the carriers are equally spaced and centered toward the RF frequency The carrier frequencies are automatically calculated depending on the selected number of carriers and the carrier spacing Arbitrary Carrier Frequency Enables the specification of the carrier f...

Page 236: ... minimized by internally calculating optimized car rier phases The phase setting displayed in the carrier table is invalid Maximize The crest factor is maximized by internally calculating optimized car rier phases The phase setting displayed in the carrier table is invalid Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CFACtor MODE on page 824 Clipping Switches the baseband clipping on and off Cli...

Page 237: ...s case the other carriers are for interfering the signal only These problems do not arise with signals of the same standard e g 3GPP The following modes are available Longest File Wins The longest I Q file in the carrier table defines the resulting signal period Shorter I Q files are periodically repeated Shortest File Wins The shortest I Q file in the carrier table defines the resulting signal pe...

Page 238: ...heir peak power and the configured Carrier Gain Example A multi carrier signal is composed from two waveform files First carrier Gain 0 dB Second carrier Gain 3 dB In the resulting multi carrier signal the peak power of the second car rier signal is 3 dB lower than the peak power of the first carrier signal Example Multi carrier signal composed of waveforms with dif ferent crest factor A multi car...

Page 239: ...Rce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe on page 826 Clock Rate Output Settings Displays the resulting sample rate at which the multi carrier waveform is output by the ARB generator The output clock rate depends on the following Number of carriers Carrier spacing Input sample rate of the leftmost or rightmost carriers Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLOCk on page 827 File Size Output Sett...

Page 240: ...Carrier 2 Select ARB Multi Carrier Carrier Table This tab comprises the settings of the individual carriers A selectable carrier range can be set with the aid of the optional Carrier Table Assistant The settings of all available carriers are displayed in table form Previously applied assistant settings can be further refined The number of lines corresponds to the number of carriers The Phase deg s...

Page 241: ...Freq MHz Sets the carrier frequency Note The carrier frequency can only be set in Arbitrary Carrier frequency mode For Equidistant Carrier Spacing the carrier spacing is determined automatically Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch FREQuency on page 828 Gain Sets the gain of a carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch POWer on page 828 Phase Sets the st...

Page 242: ...flict arises when the carriers overlap and is also indicated in the header of the Carrier Table tab Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch CONFlict on page 829 4 10 3 3 Carrier table assistant Access 1 Select Baseband ARB General Multi Carrier 2 Select ARB Multi Carrier Carrier Table Carrier Table Assistant The Carrier Table Assistant dialog enables the configuration of a select...

Page 243: ...te command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STARt on page 830 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STOP on page 830 Gain Start Sets the gain of the carrier marked by Carrier Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STARt on page 830 Gain Step Sets the step width that is used to increment the gain The resulting carrier gain in the carrier table equ...

Page 244: ...rement the delay The resulting delay in the carrier table equals Delay Delay Start n Delay Step n is a value between 0 and the difference of Carrier Stop and Carrier Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier DELay STEP on page 831 Input Waveform File Accesses the standard File Select function for selecting the input file The input file contains the I Q signal to be modulate...

Page 245: ...g general steps 1 To configure the general settings select Baseband ARB General 2 To configure the carrier table select ARB Multi Carrier Carrier Table 3 To enter the filename of the multi carrier waveform select ARB Multi Carrier Output File 4 To save and load multi carrier waveform select ARB Multi Carrier Create or Create and Load To generate a multi carrier signal for standard transmitter test...

Page 246: ...ti Carrier Perform the following a In the General dialog select Number of Carriers 4 and Carrier Spacing 5 MHz b To load the generated waveform file to all 4 carriers select Carrier Table Carrier Table Assistant Select Carrier Start 0 and Carrier Stop 3 c To load the generated waveform file to all 4 carriers select ARB Multi Carrier Table Input Waveform File Select the generated waveform file 3gpp...

Page 247: ...calculation and to load the waveform in the ARB generator select ARB Multi Carrier General Create Create and Load function 9 Select ARB General Load Waveform Confirm that you loaded the generated multi carrier waveform 10 Select ARB State On to enable the ARB generator 4 11 Generating multi carrier continuous wave signal The multi carrier continuous wave MCCW is a firmware option that enables the ...

Page 248: ...tion of each carrier and the joint configuration of subset of carriers Automatic start phase set ting is provided to minimize the crest factor The multi carrier CW signals are not generated in realtime but rather computed in arbi trary waveform mode Changes in the carrier settings are not considered until the instrument is triggered to accept and apply them The common application fields of the mul...

Page 249: ...ier settings Access Select Baseband Multi Carrier CW Settings State 249 Set to Default 250 Number of Carriers 250 Carrier Spacing 250 Bandwidth 250 Clock Frequency 250 Optimize Crest Factor Mode 251 Desired Crest Factor 251 State Enables disables the Multi Carrier CW Switching on this option turns off all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes in the corresponding signal path Gen...

Page 250: ...Hence the selected number of carriers defines the maximum carrier spacing By default the multi carrier table lists 64 carriers that are preset to the settings State On Power 0 dB Phase 0 If the selected number of carriers is less than the carriers in the table the superfluous table rows are deleted If the number of carriers exceeds the number of table rows new rows are appended to the table Remote...

Page 251: ...signal are switched on All carriers have identical power In a configuration which differs from these prerequisites the achieva ble crest factor is worse Target Crest Optimization of the crest factor to a desired value for all carrier config urations The optimization time depends on the number of carriers and the desired crest factor Computation time increases only when the num ber of carriers exce...

Page 252: ...guration of selectable range of carriers Carrier Start Stop Table Setup Assistant Defines the start stop index of the carrier range to which the following settings are intended to apply Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt on page 853 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP on page 853 Carrier State Table Setup Assistant Switches the carriers in the carrier range on off Remote command S...

Page 253: ...carrier Carrier Table Carrier Pahse is calculated as Phase Start n Phase Step Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STEP on page 852 Accept Table Setup Assistant Adopts the carrier range setting into the Carrier Table Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier EXECute on page 854 Carrier Table A table with settings for the configuration of the individual carriers The multi carrier...

Page 254: ...CW CARRier LIST POWer on page 852 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier POWer on page 851 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe on page 851 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier PHASe on page 850 4 11 3 3 Carrier graph Access Select Baseband Multi Carrier CW Carrier Graph The Carrier Graph tab is a graphical representation of the current carrier configura tion The carriers are on the X axis and the colored bars represent ...

Page 255: ... Carrier Continuous Wave Set No of Carriers 81 and Carrier Spacing 1 MHz 4 Adjust further settings e g trigger setting as required Select Multi Carrier Continuous Wave State ON 5 Enable the signal output RF ON 6 On the connected signal analyzer perform the required measurement tasks Mea sure the frequency response at the outputs of the DUT To generate a single sideband test signal for testing the ...

Page 256: ... signal analyzer perform the required measurement tasks Mea sure the frequency response at the outputs of the DUT 4 11 5 References Table 4 21 MCCW default values Parameter Value State Not affected by Set to Default Carrier Setup Number of Carriers 64 Carrier Spacing 10 kHz Optimize Crest Factor Chirp Desired Crest Factor 3 dB Trigger Mode Auto Source Internal Ext Delay 0 Ext Inhibit 0 Marker Chan...

Page 257: ...gnal on the output of the corresponding block Baseband or BB Input The shifting of the central frequency of the baseband signal is one of the tasks of the resampler 4 12 1 1 Impact of the frequency offset For some applications it is helpful to shift the baseband signal with a user defined baseband frequency offset to a different center frequency to improve signal character istics The frequency off...

Page 258: ...y offset Figure 4 29 Setting range of frequency offset Example To calculate the maximum frequency offset This example uses the following signal Standard Baseband Custom Digital Modulation Set according to Stanard WCDMA 3GPP Symbol Rate 3 84 Msym s 3 84 MHz Filter Root Cosine Roll Off Factor 0 22 The complex useful bandwidth of filtered signal is calculated as follows see Impact of the filter param...

Page 259: ...aseband sig nals A phase offset rotates each point of an I Q constellation diagram by the specified phase offset Figure 4 30 I Q constellation diagram Effect after offsetting the phase by an angle of 45 To observe the effect of offsetting the phase Use the built in real time graphical display System Configuration Graphics Con stellation and observe that the points on the I Q constellation diagram ...

Page 260: ...haracteristics by shifting the baseband signal on page 260 Remote command SOURce hw BB FOFFset on page 768 SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset on page 768 Phase Offset Enters the phase offset for the baseband signal see Chapter 4 12 1 2 Impact of the phase offset on page 259 The phase offset affects the signal on the Baseband block output Use this parameter for example to change the start phase of the baseband...

Page 261: ...er is connected to the R S SMM100A the analyzed is config ured and measures the required signal characteristics To shift the generated baseband signal Select Baseband Baseband Offsets Frequency Offset and apply an offset to the generated baseband signal To verify characteristics of the generated signal Use the built in real time graphical display Chapter 3 3 5 Verifying the generated signal with t...

Page 262: ...gnal 5 1 1 Required options The equipment layout for generating an AWGN signal includes Option Wideband Baseband Generator R S SMM B9 Option Noise Generator R S SMM K62 5 1 2 About the AWGN generator Provided the required options are installed the R S SMM100A allows you to superim pose noise on the generated signal The built in internal noise generator generates an AWGN signal Additive White Gauss...

Page 263: ...y a pure noise signal is generated and modulated to the carrier the connection to the baseband is interrupted Figure 5 1 Representation of an AWGN Mode Noise Only in the block diagram CW Interferer a sinusoidal signal with an adjustable frequency offset and car rier to interferer C I power ratio is added to the baseband signal Signal and noise parameters The Figure 5 2 illustrates the relation bet...

Page 264: ...instrument as specified in the data sheet By default the noise power within the system bandwidth is not defined directly but cal culated depending on the selected system bandwidth and the desired SNR The noise power over the noise bandwidth is calculated respectively The noise signal is not generated arbitrarily for a particular bandwidth but instead it is generated in steps Noise therefore also o...

Page 265: ...s however for example the 3GPP base station tests TS 25 141 specify the E N settings that apply to channel coded data or block segments Set the parameter Bit Rate to the required value e g the bit rate before or after chan nel coding Understanding the displayed information The following example explains the impact of the AWGN settings on the signal and noise parameters See Figure 5 3 for an exampl...

Page 266: ...e instrument to display the sig nal characteristics in real time see To observe the effect of enabled additive noise AWGN on page 439 Application fields Typically the noise generator is required for the following tests In receiver sensibility tests with predefined SNR of the receiver see To configure the AWGN for receiver sensibility tests with predefined SNR of the receiver on page 274 In bit err...

Page 267: ...these settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 4 5 SOURce AWGN subsystem on page 859 Settings 5 1 4 1 General settings Access Select Block Diagram AWGN Settings State 267 Mode 268 System Bandwidth 268 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio 268 Center Frequency Offset 268 Target CW Frequency Offset 268 State Activates deactivates the generation of an AWGN signal The interferer AWGN or CW interferer d...

Page 268: ...sponds exactly to the set C N or S N ratio For more information refer to the description of Figure 5 2 Remote command SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth on page 862 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio For Additive Noise and Noise Only modes sets the ratio of minimum noise band width to system bandwidth as required by some standards Noise Bandwidth System BW x Minimum Noise System BW Ratio The parameter Noise ...

Page 269: ...ence Mode 270 Bit Rate 270 Carrier Noise Ratio Signal Noise Ratio 270 Eb N0 271 Carrier Power Signal Power 271 Noise Power System Bandwidth Interferer Power 272 Noise Power Total Bandwidth 273 Carrier Noise Power Signal Noise Power System Bandwidth Carrier Interferer Power Signal Interferer Power 273 Carrier Noise PEP Signal Noise PEP Total Bandwidth Carrier Interferer PEP Signal Interferer PEP 27...

Page 270: ...OWer MODE on page 863 Reference Mode Selects whether the carrier or the noise power is kept constant if the C N or Eb N0 ratio is changed In the common case the instrument keeps the carrier power and adjusts the noise power accordingly Some test cases however for example the 3GPP base station tests TS 25 141 specify explicitly the noise power These test cases require that the noise power is perman...

Page 271: ...hence the power of the output signal i e the carrier noise signal It does not affect the power of the useful signal i e the carrier power is kept con stant In Reference Mode Noise sets the power of the useful signal i e the carrier power The noise power is kept constant The power of the noise signal is derived from the selected Eb N0 and displayed with the parameter Noise Power in the units of the...

Page 272: ... the power of the noise signal in the system bandwidth The power of the noise signal is derived from the entered C N or S N or Eb N0 value The carrier power is selected with Carrier Power respectively the signal power is displayed by Signal Power CW Interferer mode Reference Mode Noise Sets the power of the interfering signal The power of the carrier is derived from the entered C I value Reference...

Page 273: ...mand SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM on page 865 Carrier Noise PEP Signal Noise PEP Total Bandwidth Carrier Interferer PEP Signal Interferer PEP In Additive Noise and CW Interferer mode displays the peak envelope power PEP of the overall signal comprised of noise signal plus useful signal The output selected with the parameter Show Powers For Output determines The name of this parameter The units the ove...

Page 274: ...ion UE1 FRC FRC State On and FRC TS 36 141 A2 3 EUTRA LTE State On Status bar Frequency 1 95 GHz and Level 69 9 dBm RF State On To configure the AWGN for receiver sensibility tests with predefined SNR of the receiver We assume that an AWGN interfering signal with the following characteristics is required The mean power of the interfering signal is 82 5 dBm BW and C N 12 6 dB 1 Select AWGN and enab...

Page 275: ...and the CW signal 10 MHz below it Signals with equal or sim ilar RF levels and at frequencies spaced within the max RF bandwidth can be gener ated by the same path To configure the instrument 1 Enable the required LTE signal a Select EUTRA LTE General Uplink Setting Channel Bandwidth 5 MHz and EUTRA LTE State On b Select Status bar Frequency 1 96 GHz and Level 52 dBm 2 Enable the required interfer...

Page 276: ...iver tests To compensate the faults of the I Q demodulator in the receiver See Chapter 5 2 4 How to optimize the carrier leakage and sidebands suppression on page 282 The R S SMM100A offers functions to impair the internally generated signal or the externally fed analog I Q signal linearly Each generated I Q stream can be impaired digitally Analog impairments can be added to the externally applied...

Page 277: ...of a positive and negative gain imbalance is shown on Fig ure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Negative gain imbalance left and positive gain imbalance right in the I Q constellation diagram 5 2 2 2 I and Q offset An I offset adds a constant value to all I amplitudes leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q offset has the opposite effect A combination of I and Q values results in an I Q offset which is due to carrier...

Page 278: ...eater than 90 degrees The effect of a positive quadrature offset in the I Q con stellation diagram is shown on Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Positive quadrature offset in the I Q constellation diagram 5 2 3 Analog and digital impairments settings You can add digital impairments to each internal generated I Q stream and analog impairments to internal generated or external supplied analog I Q signals See al...

Page 279: ...Select I Q Mod Digital Impairments Select I Q Analog Digital Impairments Select I Q Digital Digital Impairments The dialog covers the settings for I Q impairment like carrier leakage imbalance offset and delay The parameters Skew and IQ Delay are enabled in the I Q Modulator or I Q Analog Digital Impairments dialog The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13 1...

Page 280: ...page 870 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch STATe on page 870 I Q Offset Sets a carrier offset in percent of the amplitudes scaled to the peak envelope power PEP for the I and or Q signal component An ideal I Q modulator suppresses the car rier offset completely offset 0 percent For more information see Chapter 5 2 2 2 I and Q offset on page 277 To optimize the carrier leakage suppression on page 282 Re...

Page 281: ... 5 2 2 3 Quadrature offset on page 278 To optimize sideband suppression on page 282 Remote command For analog impairments SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe on page 869 For digital impairments SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch QUADrature ANGLe on page 869 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch QUADrature ANGLe on page 869 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch QUADrature ANGLe on page 869 Skew In the I Q Modulator...

Page 282: ...uency To improve the attenuation of the unwanted sidebands In the following examples we assume that The R S SMM100A generates a baseband signal A spectrum analyzer is connected to the R S SMM100A the analyzed is config ured and measures the required signal characteristics To optimize sideband suppression For a given baseband signal perform the following iterative steps 1 In the block diagram selec...

Page 283: ... to compensate the frequency response influence of the test setup for example of the cables power combiners switches or mixers In the R S SMM100A you can load user defined scattering parameters S parameters files and frequency response files and pre process the infernally generated baseband signal with them See user manual R S SMM K544 User Defined Frequency Response Correction 5 4 Applying digita...

Page 284: ...n external analog I Q signal The maximum available RF bandwidth of externally applied wideband analog signal is higher than the bandwidths of the internal or external digital signal For exact values refer to the instrument specification data sheet Analog I Q input signals are directly applied to the analog I Q modulation circuit and are not routed through the baseband section of the R S SMM100A De...

Page 285: ...Q Settings I Q Modulator The dialog comprises the I Q modulator settings the optimized settings for wide band modulation and settings for enabling the analog and or digital impairments The dialog comprises the I Q modulator settings and settings for enabling digital impairments The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 8 SOURce IQ subsystem on page 895 F...

Page 286: ...e On I Q modulation can however be deactivated later e g if the relevant signal is the baseband signal and it is directly routed to the I Q outputs Remote command SOURce hw IQ STATe on page 896 Source Selects the input signal for the I Q modulator Refer to Table 6 1 for an overview of the possible input signals and the connectors they are supplied at Internal Baseband Selects the internal baseband...

Page 287: ...th the RF signal generated by the R S SMM100A Remote command SOURce hw IQ SWAP STATe on page 897 I Q Wideband Activates deactivates optimization for wideband modulation signals higher I Q modula tion bandwidth The modulation frequency response of the R S SMM100A in the useful bandwidth is improved at the expense of poorer harmonic suppression This improvement is ach ieved by shifting the switching...

Page 288: ...rnally boosted to maximize the SNR signal noise is minimized the signal distortions however increase These values are suitable for 3GPP signals with high adjacent chan nel power ratio ACPR Remote command For analog I Q signal SOURce hw IQ GAIN on page 896 For digital I Q signal SOURce hw BB IQGain on page 896 Optimization Mode Selects the optimization mode For information on the I Q modulation per...

Page 289: ...bles an automatic AM AM predistortion of the non linear RF chain During RF linearization disables Digital Predistortions AM AM and AM PM settings Adjust Linearization Current Frequency Calculates the correction data for the currently selected frequency During RF linearization disables Digital Predistortions AM AM and AM PM settings Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency Starts the adjustment for t...

Page 290: ...o Chapter 6 5 Optimizing I Q modulation performance on page 292 See user manual R S SMM K544 User Defined Frequency Response Correction Fast Fast optimization by compensation for I Q skew This mode is suitable in time sensitive environments and for narrow band signals High Quality Table This mode further improves the frequency response while maintaining setting time There is no signal interruption...

Page 291: ...ality Table defines how the signal bandwidth on that frequency response is compensated is selected Auto Signal bandwidth is determined automatically based on the smple rate of the baseband signal Manual Signal bandwidth is set with the parameter Bandwidth Remote command SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth MODE on page 884 Bandwidth In Optimization Bandwidth Manual sets the sig...

Page 292: ...t I Q Mod I Q Settings I Q Modulator On The I Q modulator is enabled Modulated is the internal baseband signal This mode generates flat signal but requires longer settling time and leads to signal interruption 2 Select Optimization Mode High Quality Note Do not use the mode I Q Modulator Optimization Mode High Quality in combi nation with the modes RF Level Setting Characteristics Uninterrupted St...

Page 293: ...To trigger the internal correction routine of the I Q modulator System error correction of the I Q modulator permits precise and repeatable measure ments If a temperature fluctuation of several degrees occurs trigger the correction routine using the following 1 Select I Q Mod I Q Modulator Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency 2 Or select Setup System Internal Adjustments Adjust I Q Modulator Cur...

Page 294: ...rection values for user correction lists Signal modes and characteristics The R S SMM100A generates unmodulated or analog modulated RF signals You can output the signal in fixed mode or as a signal having periodically varying frequencies or amplitudes Signal modes for RF signal generation Unmodulated signal Generates an unmodulated continuous wave CW of constant frequency and amplitude For informa...

Page 295: ...254 requires R S SMM K253 For more information see data sheet 7 2 How to access the RF settings Access 1 In the block diagram select the block RF RF 2 Select the required function from the list The RF block comprises all functions and settings concerning the RF signal These include the RF frequency and level settings with all enhanced functions for improv ing the signal characteristics the analog ...

Page 296: ...evel and phase Use one of the following Status Bar Frequency and Level Status Bar underlined label or RF RF Frequency Frequency Frequency RF RF Level Level Level RF RF Frequency Phase Block diagram underlined label RF Frequency Frequency Fre quency etc On the front panel press the Freq or the Level key Current frequency and level values are indicated on the Status bar so that you can see them at a...

Page 297: ... of the Frequency and Level values displayed in the status bar Figure 7 1 Frequency and Level display vs frequency and level at the RF output fRF LevelRF Frequency and level Status bar Frequency and Level at the output of the downstream instrument see also Calculation of fRF and LevelRF fRF Out LevelRF Out Frequency and level at the output connector RF RF RF Frequency Frequency and RF RF Level Amp...

Page 298: ... Step 299 Frequency Sets the RF frequency This frequency is output at the RF connector It does not consider an Offset or multipli cation factor Multiplier See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 296 Note Suppressed values in the status bar For security concerns or certain operating modes you can hide the frequency and level display in the status bar The display has ...

Page 299: ...everse frequency position The Frequency value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency as it is at the output of the downstream instrument The frequency at the R S SMM100A RF out put is not changed See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 296 Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MULTiplier on page 891 User Variation Defines and activates a user defined st...

Page 300: ...16 15 SOURce PHASe subsystem on page 933 Settings Delta Phase 300 Reset Delta Phase Display 300 Delta Phase Sets the phase of the RF signal The current phase of the signal is used as the reference Remote command SOURce hw PHASe on page 933 Reset Delta Phase Display Adopts the selected Delta Phase value as the current value and resets delta phase to 0 degrees Remote command SOURce hw PHASe REFerenc...

Page 301: ...e step width to be used when setting the RF level using the rotary knob The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 16 SOURce POWer subsystem on page 934 Settings Amplitude 301 Limit 302 Offset 302 Digital Attenuation 303 Setting Characteristics 303 Mode 304 Level Range 304 Readjust 305 User Variation 305 Variation Active 305 Variation Step 305 Amplitude Set...

Page 302: ...or the RF output power You can use this value to protect your DUT from damage due to high input power If you enter an RF level above this value the instrument limits the output power to this specified value and generates the warning message Pep value greater than the defined limit However the level indication in the status bar is not affected The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Pre...

Page 303: ...the displayed RF level value See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 296 Remote command SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation DIGital on page 937 Setting Characteristics Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behavior of the RF signal level for the specific application Auto Sets the RF output level automatically according to the selected mode In this mode ...

Page 304: ...coupling is only active when the I Q moulator is in opera tion PressingReadjust adds the value of the digital attenuation to the level setting and sets the Digital Attenuation 0 In total the level value remains constant User Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode The expert mode is a protected function that requires protection level 2 password Remote command SOURce hw POWer ...

Page 305: ...tep width Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency STEP INCRement on page 894 SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement on page 942 7 8 Local oscillator coupling The LO Coupling function allows a distribution of the local oscillator signal in a way that multiple RF signals can be derived from the same LO signal Derivation from the same LO signal is mandatory for minimizing the phase fluctuations between these RF s...

Page 306: ...ential phase delta phase of these two RF signals the follow ing are possible causes for instabilities Phase noise of the two synthesizers Weak coupling at 10 MHz and a long synthesis chain up to the RF domain Temperature differences which cause a change of the effective electrical length of some synthesizer components Most critical for a stable delta phase is the thermal RF phase fluctuation betwe...

Page 307: ... of the RF Frequency Phase Ext Reference dialog In external mode with active Out State the LO coupling mode is defined within an RF frequency range of 80 MHz to 6 GHz If you the set the RF frequency below 80 MHz the R S SMM100A adjusts the frequency to the minimum value and displays a corre sponding message Internal Uses the internal signal External Uses an externally supplied signal Remote comman...

Page 308: ...ollowing cases An external LO Coupling Mode is selected Out State is on Note If your test setup consists of several cascaded Rohde Schwarz instruments always use an external oscillator signal and start the LO level adjustment with the first instrument Continue in the order up to the last Remote command CALibration hw LOSCillator COUPling LOCal on page 677 7 8 4 How to configure cascaded instrument...

Page 309: ...ignal Generators Figure 7 2 Set up of LO coupling with three Rohde Schwarz Signal Generators Generator 1 Internal LO Out Off Generator 2 A External A B Coupled LO Out On Generator 3 External LO Out Off A frequency of 5 GHz is assumed Signal Generator 1 is a one path instrument for example R S SMM100A and uses its internal oscillator signal Signal Generator 2 is a two paths instrument for example a...

Page 310: ...e before you perform the adjustment on a subsequent instrument The signal generator automatically adjusts the internal LO signal level at the I Q modulator and LO Out connector 4 Configure Signal Generator 3 a Set Freq 5 GHz b Select RF LO Coupling Mode External c Set Out State Off d If the attenuation between the interconnection LO Out and LO In is greater than 1 dB at the oscillator frequency we...

Page 311: ...ipped with the required options the R S SMM100A can process external reference frequency in the range 1 MHz to 100 MHz and the 1 GHz reference frequency Regardless of the used reference source internal or external the R S SMM100A always provides the configured reference frequency at the output You can use it for example to synchronize several interconnected instruments see Chapter 7 9 5 Using the ...

Page 312: ... indicates the current oscillator configuration The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 17 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem on page 944 Settings Source 312 Show Connector 313 Deactivate RF Output if external reference is missing 313 External Reference Frequency 313 Variable Reference Frequency 313 Synchronization Bandwidth 314 Nominal Synchronization Bandw...

Page 313: ... no signal is supplied This function prevents that no improper RF signal due to the missing external refer ence signal is used for measurements A message indicates that the RF output is deactivated Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal RFOFf STATe on page 946 External Reference Frequency Selects the frequency of the external reference signal Set the reference output frequency with the paramet...

Page 314: ...equency of the external reference signal is outside the locking range of the internal reference oscillator spurs due to the dif ference of the internal and external reference frequency are gener ated in the reference PLL The R S SMM100A issues an error message For more information see data sheet Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth on page 947 Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth Ind...

Page 315: ...l output 10 MHz Derives a signal with 10 MHz frequency from the internal reference oscillator and provides this signal at the output 100 MHz Option R S SMM K703 Provides the 100 MHz reference frequency signal at the output 1 GHz Option R S SMM K703 Provides the 1 GHz reference frequency signal at the output Input Signal loop through Option R S SMM K703 K704 Passes the external reference frequency ...

Page 316: ...e for the internal reference frequency This value takes effect when it is activated with Adjustment Active 0 represents the calibrated state The setting range depends on the reference oscillator type and its factory calibra tion value Note The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Preset key or RST and the Save Recall function It is reset only by factory preset Remote command SOURce ROSC...

Page 317: ...8 Connectors overview Use the Show Connector function to indicate the connector on the front real panel Ref In Ref Out on page 43 1GHz Ref In Ref Out on page 43 EFC on page 44 Distributing the internal 10 MHz reference signal to further instruments The internal reference oscillator provides the reference frequency Internal fref 10 MHz 10 MHz at connector Ref Out Source Internal Reference Output 1 ...

Page 318: ...creases by a factor of 100 the relative phase fluctuations between the sources can be reduced 1 GHz at connector Ref In 1GHz and 1 GHz at Ref Out 1GHz External fRef 1 GHz Source External External Reference Frequency 1 GHz 1GHz Reference Output 1 GHz Using external reference source If you have a clean external reference signal with 10 MHz or 100 MHz frequency for example you can directly pass it to...

Page 319: ...l oscillator locked to external input 100 MHz and 1 GHz external reference signals External reference signal between 1 MHz and 100 MHz If the external reference signal is interfered noisy Figure 7 5 Synchronizing instruments with 10 MHz derived from an external reference frequency Ref Frequency Source e g Rohde Schwarz signal analyzer fRef 10 MHz 100 MHz 1 MHz to 100 MHz 1 GHz external reference f...

Page 320: ...Sweep mode is to determine the frequency response a DUT List mode The instrument generates a varying output signal based on a previously saved list with frequency amplitude and step width values While in sweep mode the fre quency or the level values change in list mode you can vary both parameters simultaneously The frequency and level values do not need to have ascending or descending order they ...

Page 321: ...sweep and list modes In both operating modes List and Sweep triggering and signal generation follow the same principle The instrument generates the signal continuously that means trig gered automatically or in individual steps controlled manually by an internal or exter nal trigger signal The instrument expects the trigger signal at the Inst Trig connector If the dwell time in sweep or list mode i...

Page 322: ... each mode see the cross reference tables See also the following programming examples on the sweep and list modes in remote control Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Example Setup an LF sweep on page 902 Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 914 Auto mode Sweep List Figure 7 8 Auto mode Sweep List The instrument generates the signal continuously Trigge...

Page 323: ... FREQuency MODE AUTO List SOURce hw LIST MODE AUTO SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce AUTO Single Extern Single mode Sweep List Figure 7 9 Single Extern Single mode sweep list In single mode you can specify that the signal returns to the start value when a sweep cycle has been completed See The Retrace function on page 328 for details The instrument generates a single sweep cycle Trigger mode Manual A ...

Page 324: ...xtern Single Remote commands Rohde Schwarz proprietary and SCPI conform value name RF frequency sweep TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce SINGle BUS Single or TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce EXTernal EXTernal Extern Single SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO RF level sweep TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce SINGle BUS for Single or TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce EXTernal EXTernal for Extern Sin gle SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE AUTO ...

Page 325: ...gnal generation with State Off Trigger sources The rotary knob at the front panel The Arrow keys at the front panel The corresponding remote control commands An externally applied trigger signal To step through the sweep frequencies or levels In manual mode Set the Current Frequency or Current Level values Use the Up and Down keys or the rotary knob In remote control mode Use the commands SOURce h...

Page 326: ...w SWEep POWer MODE STEP LF frequency sweep TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce SINGle BUS Step or TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce EXTernal EXTenal Extern Step SOURce hw LFOutput ch SWEep FREQuency MODE STEP List SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce SINGle Step or SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Extern Step SOURce hw LIST MODE STEP Extern Start Stop mode sweep Figure 7 11 Extern Start Stop mode sweep The instrum...

Page 327: ... control mode Extern Start Stop Remote commands Rohde Schwarz proprietary and SCPI conform value name RF frequency sweep TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO RF level sweep TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE AUTO LF frequency sweep TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce EAUTo SOURce hw LFOutput ch SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO Manual mode Sweep List The manual ...

Page 328: ... SOURce hw LIST INDex Index The Retrace function Retrace is a function especially designed for Single sweep modes when the sweep signal follows a sawtooth shape Working in this mode the instrument performs a sin gle sweep cycle when a trigger event occurs The signal generation stops at the set end point stop frequency or stop level and waits for the next trigger event In this state the upper value...

Page 329: ...of changing the sweep mode during performance If you change the sweep mode during the execution the signal generator stops the sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value Combined RF frequency level sweep processing mode The combined RF sweep functionality processes the signal similar to the Live list mode The R S SMM100A sets the frequency and level values simultaneously in ...

Page 330: ...OINts Number of steps within the sweep range Sweep range The sweep range is defined by a start and an end value How the remaining parame ters correlate is shown below Offset 0 Sweep Range fSTARt to fSTOP fCENTer fSTARt fSTOP 2 fSPAN fSTOP fSTARt Where fSTARt fCENTer fSPAN 2 fSTOP fCENTer fSPAN 2 Offset 0 A defined offset also affects the sweep range and the center frequency Therefore the set frequ...

Page 331: ...s are calculated as follows For fSTARt fSTOP f2 f1 1 step_log 100 If f2 fSTOP then f2 fSTOP For fSTARt fSTOP f2 f1 1 step_log 100 If f2 fSTOP then f2 fSTOP With Shape Triangle the frequency values on the slope from fSTOP to fSTARt are the same as on the slope from fSTARt to fSTOP If you specify the number of steps within the sweep range the step size is adjusted according to the following correlat...

Page 332: ...ue 2 Stop value 3 Step size The current frequency or level of an RF frequency level or LF frequency sweep is determined by the shape e g sawtooth or triangle and the spacing linear or logarith mic and the step size 7 10 3 About list mode The list mode is used to generate the RF signal based on a set of predefined fre quency and amplitude value pairs with individual step times You can define the va...

Page 333: ...e configuration between instru ments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again Externally Create a list file as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel with a Notepad or a similar tool and save it with the predefined extension Transfer the file to and load it into the instrument Dwell time mode You can choose whether you want to use different dwell times or a fixed value...

Page 334: ...he R S SMM100A signals an overrun or even stops sweep or list mode signal generation if the delay gets too long The instrument diplays corresponding error messages Hardware adjustments The first time a list new or modified is processed the instrument automatically calcu lates the necessary hardware settings It can be performed during list processing but delays the first cycle especially with short...

Page 335: ...he time of recording Modifications of settings during list processing are ignored If you turn off the instrument the list file remains saved on the internal memory but not the learned data in the temporary memory When to use the Learn List Mode Data function The instrument performs the learning process in the following situations RF state is on prerequisite You deliberately activate this function ...

Page 336: ...uency Sweep The sweep modes use the similar parameters to be configured Thus the descrip tion comprises the settings of the three dialogs RF Frequency Sweep RF Level Sweep and LF Frequency Sweep If parameters relate to only particular modes they are pointed out The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13 16 6 SOURce FREQuency subsystem on page 885 Chapter 13 1...

Page 337: ...frequency sweep Activates RF frequency sweep signal generation Note Active RF frequency RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MODE on page 889 State RF level sweep Activates RF level sweep signal generation Note Active RF frequency RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice v...

Page 338: ...or all sweep Modes except of Mode Step In this mode you can enter the next frequency setting manually Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MANual on page 891 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MANual on page 905 Current Level Displays the current level sweep value for all sweep Modes except of Mode Step In this mode you can enter the next level setting manually Remote command SOURce hw POWer MANual on pag...

Page 339: ... trigger is applied Remote command RF frequency sweep SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RETRace on page 956 RF level sweep SOURce hw SWEep POWer RETRace on page 956 LF frequency sweep SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency RETRace on page 912 Shape Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal Sawtooth The sweep runs from start to stop frequency The subsequent sweep starts at the start value i e the shape of...

Page 340: ...r DWELl on page 952 LF frequency sweep SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl on page 911 Trigger Slope For Mode Extern Step Single selects the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger Trigger signal is expected at the Inst Trig connector Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal triggers the instru...

Page 341: ...mote command SOURce hw SWEep RESet ALL on page 960 7 10 5 2 Frequency range settings Access 1 Select for example RF Sweep List RF Frequency Sweep 2 Select Frequency Range Settings Start Frequency Stop Frequency 341 Center Frequency 342 Span 342 Spacing 342 Step Linear Step Logarithmic 342 Start Frequency Stop Frequency Defines the frequency sweep range by setting the start and end values See Chapt...

Page 342: ...value entered as absolute value in Hz Logarithmic Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value i e as a constant fraction of the current frequency in Remote command RF frequency sweep SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SPACing on page 955 Step Linear Step Logarithmic In RF LF Frequency Sweep mode sets the step width for the individual frequency sweep steps The value is added at each sweep step to the cur...

Page 343: ...F level sweep range by setting the start and end values See Chapter 7 10 2 1 Correlating parameters in sweep mode on page 329 Remote command RF level sweep SOURce hw POWer STARt on page 941 SOURce hw POWer STOP on page 941 Step Count In RF Combined Mode defines the number of sweeps to be executed in Mode Sin gle To start the sweep cycles select Execute Single Remote command SOURce hw SWEep COMBine...

Page 344: ...e of the instrument The step attenuator is fixed Note Do not use the mode I Q Modulator Optimization Mode High Quality in combination with the modes RF Level Setting Charac teristics Uninterrupted Strictly Monotone The high quality I Q optimization leads to RF signal interruption The requirements of the RF level modes Uninterrupted and Strictly Monotone can not be fulfilled Strictly Monotone Execu...

Page 345: ...nge of the level that you can use in the currently selected mode Remote command SOURce hw POWer RANGe LOWer on page 944 SOURce hw POWer RANGe UPPer on page 944 7 10 6 List mode settings The List Mode dialog contains all the functions and settings for creating and handling lists with RF frequency level pairs for generating the RF signal based on these values Access Select RF Sweep List List mode Th...

Page 346: ...tate Activates the list mode and processes the currently selected list Note Active RF frequency RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MODE on page 889 Current Index Sets the list index for list processing in Step mode In the other modes the index indi cates the current step Remote command SOURce hw LIST INDex on p...

Page 347: ...LIST TRIGger SOURce on page 922 SOURce hw LIST MODE on page 921 Dwell Time Mode Selects either variable dwell times or a fixed dwell time to perform signal generation in list mode Global Uses the same dwell time for all lists steps set with Global Dwell Time From List Uses the dwell times from the list You can define the dwell time for each frequency level value pair indi vidually see Chapter 7 10...

Page 348: ...nt trigger Trigger signal is expected at the Inst Trig connector Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument Remote command SOURce hw INPut TRIGger SLOPe on page 895 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrumen...

Page 349: ...ing lists on page 333 Remote command SOURce hw LIST CATalog on page 923 SOURce hw LIST SELect on page 925 SOURce hw LIST DELete on page 923 SOURce hw LIST DELete ALL on page 924 Edit List Mode Data Opens the editor to insert and save data lists with RF frequency power and dwell time values see Chapter 7 10 7 List editor on page 351 You find this function also in standard file select dialog accesse...

Page 350: ...Settings 350 Select ASCII Source Select ASCII Destination 351 Select Source Select ASCII Destination 351 Import Export 351 Mode Selects import or export of a data list file The provided parameters vary according to the selected mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange MODE on page 927 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange MODE on page 882 ASCII File Settings Defines the format and the separators of t...

Page 351: ...er that the loaded file is saved Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe CATalog on page 925 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect on page 926 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog on page 881 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect on page 882 Select Source Select ASCII Destination In Mode Export access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions Where S...

Page 352: ...mode Access to Edit List Mode Data RF Sweep List List Mode List Mode Data Edit List Mode Data The editor for list mode provides a table with RF frequency and power values an extra column for defining variable dwell times and standard navigation functions The remote commands required to define the list mode data are described in Chapter 13 16 11 SOURce LIST subsystem on page 914 Access to Edit User...

Page 353: ...If a function relates to a particular dialog it is explicitly stated Settings Edit List Mode Data 353 Data handling keys 354 Go To 354 Edit 354 Fill with Sensor 354 Save As Save 354 Fill 354 Edit List Mode Data Table with values for list or user correction processing Note Once you enter a value the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns This functionality protects against dat...

Page 354: ...COR mode only See Chapter 7 12 3 3 Fill with sensor on page 402 Save As Save Data handling keys Stores the list in a file with user defined name and predefined file extension To save a copy or create a file use the Save as function Fill Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user defined values To fill the table select Fill Note Once you enter a value or fill a column the edito...

Page 355: ...weep List RF Frequency Sweep 3 Select Mode Auto 4 Select Spacing Linear 5 Set Dwell Time 15 0 ms 6 In the Frequency Range tab set Start Freq 200 MHz and Stop Freq 600 MHz Alternatively you can set Center Freq 400 MHz and Span 400 MHz 7 Set the step width Step Lin 10 MHz and Dwell Time 10 0 ms 8 In the Advanced tab trigger the sweep Auto 9 In the General tab select State On Example Fast changing fr...

Page 356: ... frequency power and dwell time values in the same way 7 Select Save and close the dialog To configure the list mode and start signal generation 1 In the General tab select List Mode Auto 2 Select Dwell Time Mode From List 3 Select List Mode Data Learn List Mode Data 4 Switch state to On 5 Select Run Mode Learned Frozen RF Settings 6 Select General State On The instrument continuously generates an...

Page 357: ... is limited For more information see data sheet The settings of the modulation signal affect all analog modulations that use an internal modulation source In sweep mode LF frequency sweep is possible You can feed an external LF signal in each of the two paths An activated analog modulation automatically turns off I Q modulation Arbitrary waveform generation Digital modulation Digital standards 7 1...

Page 358: ...quency or phase modulation signals are input at the Mod Ext connector Pulse modulation signals at the Pulse Ext connector Signal output You can perform AM FM and PhiM with the signal of any of the provided sources Moreover you can combine two modulation signals and generate a two tone signal Regardless of the signal source the generated signal can be output for further pro cessing in a downstream ...

Page 359: ...05 7 11 2 1 Modulation signal waveforms The following graphs show the modulation signal waveforms of the R S SMM100A LF Generator The LF and multifunction generators support the following signal shapes Sine 1 Period Pulse 1 Pulse period 2 Pulse width Analog modulations ...

Page 360: ... Triangle rise Trapezoid 1 Trapezoid rise 2 Trapezoid high 3 Trapezoid fall 4 Trapezoid period To configure the associated parameters of a signal shape see Shape on page 377 Pulse Generator The high performance pulse generator enables you to generate single or double pulse signals Analog modulations ...

Page 361: ...ns Use one of the following Select RF Amplitude Modulation Frequency Modualtion Phase Modualtion State ON Select Mod Off Modulation On Press the Mod on off key Mod on off Activate one or more analog modulations and press the Mod on off key to toggle the state of them all Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch off Remote command SOURce hw MODulation ALL ST...

Page 362: ...stem on page 752 Chapter 13 16 3 4 SOURce PM subsystem on page 757 Chapter 13 16 3 5 SOURce PULM subsystem on page 762 Chapter 13 16 10 SOURce LFOutput subsystem on page 902 7 11 4 1 Pulse modulation settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation Pulse Modulation Table 7 8 Pulse modulation Signal Source Pulse Generator internal Signal Source External The Pulse Modulation dialog contains all parameter...

Page 363: ...s between Fast or Smoothed slew rate slope Fast Enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times Smoothed Flattens the slew rate resulting in longer rise fall times Use this mode if you are working with devices that are sensitive to steep slopes Note The R S SMM100A supports this functionality up to a certain frequency depending on the installed frequency options see also Interactions an...

Page 364: ...e Input Sets the high low threshold in volts for the signal at the User4 6 connectors The input signal is defined with the parameter Signal The same threshold applies for all 3 connectors and any input signal e g external pulse modulation or trigger signal Remote command SOURce INPut USER PULM LEVel on page 737 Impedance Pulse Input Selects the input impedance for an external pulse modulation sign...

Page 365: ...Noise Generator Selects the internally generated noise signal Remote command SOURce hw AM ch SOURce on page 750 SOURce hw FM ch SOURce on page 755 SOURce hw PM ch SOURce on page 759 FM settings The following settings are dedicated to FM Deviation FM settings Sets the frequency modulation deviation in Hz The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode see data she...

Page 366: ...he deviation of both paths proportionally Changing the deviation of one path adjusts the deviation of the other path The sum always results in the set total deviation Remote command SOURce hw FM DEViation SUM on page 756 Ratio Path2 Path1 FM settings Sets the deviation ratio path2 to path1 in percent Example If the deviation in path1 is 10 kHz and the ratio is 50 the deviation in path 2 is auto ma...

Page 367: ... sum always results in the set Total Deviation Fixed Ratio Couples the deviation ratio of both paths If you change the deviation of any path the R S SMM100A adjusts the value of the other path Remote command SOURce hw PM DEViation MODE on page 760 Total Deviation PhiM settings In Deviation Mode Fixed Total sets the sum of the signal deviation for path 1 and path 2 Deviation of both paths always su...

Page 368: ... Depth AM settings Determines the depth of the modulation signal in percent The depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power PEP Remote command SOURce hw AM ch DEPTh on page 751 Sensitivity AM settings Sets the input sensitivity of the external modulation signal Remote command SOURce hw AM ch SENSitivity on page 752 Deviation Mode AM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both path...

Page 369: ...tings Changing the total depth adjusts the depths of both paths proportionally Changing the depth of one path adjusts the depth of the other path The sum always results in the set total depth Remote command SOURce hw AM DEPTh SUM on page 751 Ratio Path2 Path1 AM settings Sets the deviaton ratio of the signal depth for path 2 to path 1 in per cent when using combined sources Remote command SOURce h...

Page 370: ...e Modulation 373 Pulse Mode Sets the operating mode of the pulse generator Depending on the selection the instru ment displays the associated parameters Single Generates a single pulse in one pulse period Double Generates two pulses in one pulse period Remote command SOURce hw PULM MODE on page 763 Trigger Mode Selects between continuous triggering or triggering initiated by a trigger event from a...

Page 371: ...ing Trigger Mode Ext Triggered 1 External trigger signal input with Trigger Input Polarity Normal the positive slope is active 2 Sync signal 3 Pulse signal a Trigger signal during double pulse generation is without effect Δt Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start see data sheet delay Double Pulse Delay 200 ns the first pulse starts without a delay PW Double Pulse Width 100 ns ...

Page 372: ...ulse Width 100 ns period Pulse Period 300 ns time between the pulse start of two consecutive pul ses a Gate active duration pulses are generated during the gate active part Remote command SOURce hw PULM TRIGger MODE on page 764 Pulse Period Sets the repetition rate of the generated pulse signal Remote command SOURce hw PULM PERiod on page 764 Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration of the generated pu...

Page 373: ...he output of the pulse modulation signal Remote command SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut STATe on page 932 Pulse Output Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal Remote command SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut POLarity on page 932 Set Global Connector for Pulse Modulation Routes the pulse input signal by default to the global user connector Pulse Ext4 Pulse In A and correspondingly the pulse out...

Page 374: ...0A 374 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 The height of the bars corresponds to the selected amplitude of the pulse signal Figure 7 16 Pulse Graph single pulse 1 Pulse Period 2 Pulse Delay 3 Pulse Width 4 Pulse Zoom Position Analog modulations ...

Page 375: ...dth 5 Pulse Zoom Position Zooming You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the graph in more detail Zoom Position Sets the focus on the time axis where to enlarge the graph Zoom In Enlarges the graph at the selected position Zoom Out for the reverse operation 7 11 4 5 AM FM and PhiM modulation sources Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source Analog modulations ...

Page 376: ... settings of the Connectors dialog The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 10 SOURce LFOutput subsystem on page 902 Source LF generator settings Access Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source LF Generator You can use the internal LF signal as modulation signal source for any of the ana log modulations The LF signal applies to all modulations whic...

Page 377: ...List mode and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE on page 906 Shape Selects the waveform shape of the LF generator signal The Triangle and Trapezoid waveforms require option R S SMM K24 Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe on page 908 Frequency Sets the frequency of the LF generator for sine signals Set the signal shape with the parameter Shape Remote command SOURce h...

Page 378: ...APe TRIangle RISE on page 910 Trapezoid Rise Fall Sets the time required for the trapezoid signal to change from low level to high level and vice versa Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze RISE on page 910 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze FALL on page 909 Trapezoid High Sets how long the trapezoid signal is at high level Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH on p...

Page 379: ...Pling ch on page 894 Impedance Sets the impedance for the externally supplied signal Remote command SOURce hw INPut MODext IMPedance ch on page 895 Bandwidth Displays the maximum bandwidth of the external LF signal Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch BANDwidth on page 904 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the ins...

Page 380: ...power density Gauss Generates the noise power according to a Gaussian distribution Equal Generates an evenly distributed noise Remote command SOURce hw NOISe DISTribution on page 929 Bandwidth Sets the noise bandwidth as distinct value You can set the bandwidth between 100 kHz and 10 MHz in 100 KHz steps The noise signal is generated within the set frequency bandwidth The noise level in the freque...

Page 381: ...tput determine the output voltage or add a DC offset LF output settings Access Select RF Output LF Output Settings State 381 Source 381 Output Voltage 382 DC Offset 382 Show Connector 382 State Activates the output of the LF signal Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch STATe on page 907 Source Determines the LF signal to be synchronized of the corresponding path Analog modulations ...

Page 382: ...LF output source This value e g 1 V to 1 V refers to 50 Ohm at the RF output with high termination impedance at the LF output Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch VOLTage on page 907 DC Offset Adds a DC offset to the LF output signal Remote command SOURce LFOutput ch OFFSet on page 907 Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear pan...

Page 383: ...oise Density Indicates the level of the noise signal for a bandwidth of 1 Hz relative Remote command SOURce hw NOISe LEVel RELative on page 929 Noise Level Indicates the level of the noise signal per Hz within the total bandwidth absolute Remote command SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute on page 929 Analog modulations ...

Page 384: ...ns and the signal being output Here you can Select the output signal LF Out per path the setting acts as the parameter LF Output Source Select the source for each modulation and modulation path the setting acts as the parameter Source Activate modulation per path the setting acts as the parameter State To generate a two tone signal composed form the two paths of the same modu lation type activate ...

Page 385: ...se the internal LF generator To set the frequency and level of the RF signal 1 Press Preset to start from a defined state 2 In the status bar set Frequency 2 GHz 3 Set Level 20 dBm To configure the modulation signal LF generator 1 Select RF Analog Modulation Modulation Source 2 In the Sources tab select Shape Sine 3 Set Frequency 20 kHz The period is calculated automatically and indicates Period 5...

Page 386: ...lse modulation 1 Select the Pulse Modulation tab 2 Set State I to activate pulse modulation 3 Set RF On to enable signal output 7 12 Improving level performance To adjust the RF output signal to specific needs in your application optimally the R S SMM100A provides different functions Attenuator The R S SMM100A is equipped with a step attenuator that enables you to vary the amplitude of the RF sign...

Page 387: ...er viewer on page 410 7 12 1 Attenuator About the attenuator The step attenuator is either an electronic or mechanical device Instruments with fre quency options up to 20 GHz use an electronic step attenuator providing fast and wear free level settings Instruments capable to generate higher frequency signals use mechanical step attenuators According to the requirements of your application you can ...

Page 388: ... Full Attenuation has priority over the RF level Mode Fixed or Manual regardless of the selected settings characteristics 7 12 1 1 Attenuator settings Access Select RF RF Level Level Attenuator In the Attenuator dialog you can select the operating mode of the step attenuator the instrument is equipped with The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 13 OUTPut...

Page 389: ... use in the selected mode Remote command OUTPut hw AFIXed RANGe LOWer on page 698 OUTPut hw AFIXed RANGe UPPer on page 698 RF OFF Mode Determines the state of the step attenuator when the RF signal is switched off The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Preset key or RST and the Save Recall function It is reset only by factory preset Unchanged Freezes the setting of the step attenuator...

Page 390: ... frequencies below 200 kHz and if the optimization mode IQ modulation is different than FAST Also note that ALC can detect incorrect values in multi transmitter test setups If mul tiple generators are coupled reverse power can affect the ALC readings which leads to an incorrect RF output power ALC states and their effects The following description basically explains the ALC states and their princi...

Page 391: ...value of the internal level table and then activates the automatic level control This mode achieves maximum level accuracy and fast set ting times The R S SMM100A displays the level control setting as a status message in the info line How to See Chapter 7 12 2 2 How to enable the ALC on page 393 7 12 2 1 ALC settings Access Select RF RF Level Automatic Level Control In the ALC dialog you can confi...

Page 392: ... this sample pulse see Sample Level on page 393 in the ALC dialog It does not consider any signal headroom e g applied to a user defined ARB waveform How to See Chapter 7 12 2 2 How to enable the ALC on page 393 Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC STATe on page 935 Mode In ALC State AUTO the R S SMM100A indicates the currently active ALC mode that is set automatically Remote command SOURce hw POWer...

Page 393: ...ument during the sample process How to See Chapter 7 12 2 2 How to enable the ALC on page 393 Full Attenuates the sample level by the crest factor of the used I Q modu lation signal or 9 dB whichever is lower Additionally an internal headroom of the signal is considered Attenuated Sets an additional attenuation of 40 dB Minimum Sets the attenuation to maximum Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC SLE...

Page 394: ...ut Figure 7 18 Effect of external losses on the signal flatness at the DUT input DUT Device under test Components Designation of all components between the measurement equipment and the DUT e g cables 1 Flat signal at the outputs of the R S SMM100A 2 Signal received at the DUT incl the external losses About UCOR User correction UCOR is a method that determines the external level loss over a fre qu...

Page 395: ...e generator adds the correction value internally and thus increa ses the output level by exactly the amount of the loss between its output and the DUT For frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is calculated by interpolation of the closest correction values Possible ways for configuring the user correction values You can configure correction values in the following wa...

Page 396: ...r sensor for frequency response measurements Consider the following when using R S NRP power sensors to measure the correction values Measure the level directly at the input of the DUT Use the internal correction functions of an R S NRP power sensor to increase the measurement accuracy Use S parameter to consider the impact of any two port device like an adapter between the signal generator and th...

Page 397: ... State On The UCOR dialog contains all settings for creating and handling files with user defined level correction values The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 16 5 SOURce CORRection subsystem on page 875 Settings State 397 User Correction 398 UCOR Data 398 Edit UCOR Data 398 State Activates user correction The R S SMM100A displays the status icon Lev U...

Page 398: ...ed files to the instru ment Remote command SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog on page 880 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect on page 879 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete on page 881 Edit UCOR Data Opens the build in table editor to define a new correction table or edit an existing one See also Chapter 7 10 7 List editor on page 351 Fill on page 354 Chapter 7 12 3 3 Fill with sensor on page 402 7 12 3 2 Lis...

Page 399: ... RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions The remote commands required to define the user correction data are described in Chapter 13 16 5 SOURce CORRection subsystem on page 875 All columns in a row must contain values Cells with missing values are therefore filled automatically using the value of the previous row If you use global dwell time in list mode consider also that...

Page 400: ...alues in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows are lost when saving You can simply override these values Frequency Hz Sets the frequency values Remote command SOURce hw LIST FREQuency on page 919 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency on page 878 Power dBm list mode data table Sets the level values Remote command SOURce hw LIST POWer on page 92...

Page 401: ...nction Fill Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user defined values To fill the table select Fill Note Once you enter a value or fill a column the editor automatically adds preset val ues in the other columns This functionality protects against data loss otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving You can simply override these values From Range Defines the start line ...

Page 402: ...tion on power sensors and how to use them see Chapter 7 12 5 How to calibrate the power level with an R S NRP power sensor on page 417 Settings Fill User Correction Data with Sensor 402 Used SMM100A Settings For Measurement 403 Fill User Correction Data with Sensor Sensor Displays connected sensors for selection List To Fill Indicates the used list S Parameter Indicates whether S Parameter correct...

Page 403: ...ORRection ZERoing STATe on page 880 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA SENSor ch POWer SONCe on page 879 Used SMM100A Settings For Measurement Displays the settings relevant for the measurement Modulation Indicates the modulation state Amplitude Displays the currently set level Remote command SOURce hw POWer POWer on page 940 Offset Displays the level offset set with Offset on page 302 Remote command ...

Page 404: ...port Export 405 Mode Selects import or export of a data list file The provided parameters vary according to the selected mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange MODE on page 927 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange MODE on page 882 ASCII File Settings Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file Extension Selects csv or txt format Decimal Point Sets Point dot or Comma as the de...

Page 405: ...ts the file to be exported Select ASCII Destination defines the filename and the file path for the exported file Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange SELect on page 927 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange SELect on page 883 Import Export Imports or exports the selected data list file depending on the current mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange EXECute on page 926 SOURce hw CORRection DEXCha...

Page 406: ...ways Connection to the Sensor connector R S NRP ZK6 six pole interface cable for R S NRPxx power sensors No additional cable for R S NRP Zxx power sensors cable is fixed on the sen sor Connection to the USB connector Requires the following cables depending on the used sensor type R S NRP ZKU USB interface cable for R S NRPxx power sensors R S NRP Z3 or R S NRP Z4 USB adapter cables for sensors of ...

Page 407: ... is connected to this socket channel 1 remains unassigned Sensors 2 to 4 are assigned to the sensors at the USB connectors according to their sequence of connection You can change the default mapping in the NRP sensor mapping dialog On connection the R S SMM100A immediately starts the measurement of a detected R S NRP power sensor If you perform an instrument preset Preset key or RST the R S SMM10...

Page 408: ... S SMM100A can only use up to four sensors simultaneously The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 14 SENSe READ INITiate and SLISt subsystems on page 699 Settings Sensor Mapping List 408 Scan 409 Clear 409 Add Sensor Hide Add Sensor 409 Add Sensor settings 409 Add LAN Sensor settings 409 Add USB Sensor settings 409 Sensor Mapping List Shows the sensors th...

Page 409: ...res settings to add sensors connected to the R S SMM100A via USB or LAN Add LAN Sensor settings Add Sensor settings Configures settings to add sensors connected to the R S SMM100A via LAN IP Address or Host Name Displays the host name or the IP address of a R S NRP power sen sor If the R S SMM100A does not detect a connected R S NRP sensor you can assign the address information manually Add LAN Se...

Page 410: ...Power Viewer dialog The power viewer function uses averaging filters for getting a stable readout Measurement results could be interfered for instance by to much noise in your setup by a bad supression of harmonics or non harmonics or when you reach the sensitivity level of your power sensor Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window The measure ment result is obtained by a...

Page 411: ...ction Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power For this purpose the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor If a Rohde Schwarz power sensor receives an input power during the zeroing process it aborts zeroing and generates an error message Zeroing takes a few seconds depending on the sensor model Refer to the documentat...

Page 412: ...ion on page 394 Additional information See Rohde Schwarz website http www rohde schwarz com in section Power Meters Voltmeters for R S NRP power sensor manual Information on the R S NRP Z5 sensor hub and the available accessories Sensor software updates NRP power viewer settings Access Select RF RF Measurement NRP Power Viewer The Overview tab shows the list of detected sensors and provides a sepa...

Page 413: ...Offset 415 Filter 415 Filter Length 415 Auto Once 416 Noise Signal Ratio 416 Timeout 416 Default Aperture Time 416 Aperture Time 416 S Parameter 416 Enable Logging 417 Sensor type and serial number Indicates the type and the serial number of the selected R S NRP power sensor and the channel the sensor is assigned to The displayed Level Peak Level Average values correspond to the particular sen sor...

Page 414: ...r the measurement source and if set the offset You can activate the permanent display for several sensors Remote command SENSe ch POWer DISPlay PERManent STATe on page 707 Display Display Sensor Settings Sets the display of results on mean or peak power Remote command SENSe ch POWer DISPlay PERManent PRIority on page 707 Use Frequency Of Sensor Settings Selects the source for measurement RF The R ...

Page 415: ...ied the filter length and therefore the measurement time can be short When low output power is applied the filter length and therefore the measurement time is increased which reduces the considered noise content in your measurement User The filter length is defined manually with the parameter Filter Length As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window constant filter length result...

Page 416: ...s parameter to specify a user defined aperture time per sensor if for example the readings vary To obtain stable readings set the Aperture Time exactly to one modulation period Remote command SENSe ch POWer APERture DEFault STATe on page 706 Aperture Time Sensor Settings If Use Default Aperture Time Off defines the acquisition time per sensor For example to obtain a sufficient low average value se...

Page 417: ...torage capacity Note The logging function is intended for measurements with long time intervals It is suitable source for data reconstructions if the connection to the sensor was interrupted Remote command SENSe ch POWer LOGGing STATe on page 711 7 12 5 How to calibrate the power level with an R S NRP power sensor Using a R S NRP power sensor and the user correction function of the instrument you ...

Page 418: ...ou want to use 4 Select Zero to start zeroing of the sensor Note Always turn the RF power off or disconnect the sensor from RF before zero ing since the function calibrates the power sensor at zero signal power The zeroing process takes a few seconds depending on the power sensor type 5 Configure additional parameters for the selected sensor as required 6 Select State On 7 Close the dialog To crea...

Page 419: ...ill to insert the frequency values The Fill function also fills the column of the Correction Value dB values with a predefined value since empty cells lead to the data loss of the entire line If you need different values you can change them manually or you can use the auto matic function Fill with Sensor as described in the next steps 8 Select Fill with Sensor The Fill User Correction Data With Se...

Page 420: ...step the file is loaded in the User Correction dialog automatically Otherwise you can load a previously saved file 1 Select RF RF Level User Correction 2 Select UCOR Data UCOR Data if there is no file loaded already 3 Select the directory and file you want to use 4 Load the file with Select 5 To view the file content select Edit UCOR Data 6 Select UCOR Data State On to apply the user correction va...

Page 421: ...ction and visualize a subset of signal characteristics 8 1 1 Required options The minimum equipment layout for using this function includes the base unit 8 1 2 About the graphical signal display To ease the setting and routing of baseband signals R S SMM100A is able to capture these signals and display them graphically in different ways as I Q vector eye or con stellation diagram as power spectrum...

Page 422: ...r time Figure 8 1 I Q diagram with markers window with two separate coordinate systems with identical X and Y axes X axis time represented as number of symbols chips or samples depending on the signal Y axis amplitude scaled to the peak envelope power where minimum scaled amplitude 1 maximum scaled amplitude 1 Application To analyze impairments added noise and signals e g from external baseband in...

Page 423: ...ode shows the signal like an oscilloscope X Y mode Signal acquisition points See Table 8 2 Constellation diagram Constellation diagrams display the modulation symbols as discrete points in the I Q plane Unlike the vector diagram the constellation diagram displays only one sample per symbol This sample represents the symbol Constellation diagrams are helpful when generating signals using the Custom...

Page 424: ...cation To classify modulation Signal acquisition points See Table 8 2 Eye diagram The eye diagram displays synchronized and superimposed sections of either the in phase or the quadrature components of the signal Figure 8 4 Eye diagram with partially closed eye QPSK X axis time in the range of 1 symbol Y axis amplitude scaled to the peak envelope power where minimum scaled amplitude 1 maximum scale...

Page 425: ...power where the average power RMS corresponds to the origin Y axis Probability of exceeding the average power that is the percentage of time the signal spends at or above the power level specified by the X axis Marker 1 Interpolation 10 3 of the samples exceed 3 3 dB above average simularilly 1 of the samples exceed 7 5 dB above avarage not shown with a marker Marker 2 The point where the trace cr...

Page 426: ...8 2 8 1 2 2 Signal acquisition points Signal characteristics can be displayed using different methods and different acquisi tion points also at the same time Table 8 2 shows which signal acquisition point is suitable for which kind of graphics mode Also it provides associated graphics sources and the designation of the access points in the block diagram Table 8 2 Signal acquisition points modes an...

Page 427: ...y a visual tool it does not change the number of samples used for the calculation You can increase the number of samples before zooming See also To zoom into a diagram on page 438 Using markers Markers are tools for numerical readout of measured data in diagrams They help you analyze the displayed signal characteristics by determining particular values in the dia gram Often you can use markers to ...

Page 428: ... are marked in red data points in areas with low probability in blue Thus for example you can observe not only the level versus frequency trace but also a third dimension the probability of the power level Reference trace Reference traces help you analyze a displayed characteristic as do the markers Ref erence traces are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in the re...

Page 429: ...le signal acquisition points use the parameter Source 4 To enable the graphical signal display select Add A thumbnail of the graphical signal display is shown in the taskbar Figure 8 9 Graphics configuration dialog with active graphical signal displays 5 To enlarge the thumbnail select it Settings Graphical Diagrams Table 430 Mode 430 Source 430 Displaying baseband signal characteristics in real t...

Page 430: ...ce BB GRAPhics SOURce on page 873 FFT Length In Mode Power Sepectrum selects the number of samples to be included in the graph of the power spectrum Remote command SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTLen on page 874 Full Scale dBFS In Mode Power Spectrum determines the normalization of the power values in the diagram Observe the change in the units on the y axis On The maximal digital power I Q max is mapped to...

Page 431: ...ion corre sponds to a display covering the entire signal bandwidth The higher the resolution the shorter the length of the displayed signal segment Auto The resolution is set to an optimum value in terms of signal and dis play type Full Bandwidth The resolution is set so that the display covers the entire signal band width User Activates the Sample Rate input field where you can manually set the r...

Page 432: ...displays 8 1 4 Graphical signal display settings Access 1 Select Taskbar System Config Graphics Add 2 Double click the thumbnail in the taskbar Figure 8 10 Graphical signal display of a power spectrum with markers This section focuses on the functions of the enlarged graphical signal displays Settings Configure 433 Stop Run 433 Zoom Out 433 Reference Curves 433 Display Units 433 Show Hide marker 4...

Page 433: ...isplayed signal Zoom Out Resets a previous zoom see also To zoom into a diagram on page 438 Reference Curves Accesses the dialog for defining reference curves see Reference Curve on page 433 Display Units Changes the units of the X axis The available values depend on the generated signal Show Hide marker Sets two markers to the displayed signal or hides them See also Using markers on page 427 To e...

Page 434: ...ics display This section shows you how to use the different graphic modes to visualize the signal characteristics of the generated signal It shows also how to observe the effect of stan dard settings like applied filter an enabled fading or AWGN The examples use a sim ple custom digital modulated signal To generate a simple WCDMA 3GPP QPSK 45 offset signal Use the custom digital modulation Enable ...

Page 435: ...Baseband 4 To view the signal select Add A new thumbnail minimized view indicating the constellation diagram appears in the Taskbar 5 To enlarge the constellation diagram select it The displayed constellation diagram confirms the used modulation type see Fig ure 8 11 Displaying baseband signal characteristics in real time ...

Page 436: ...nd verify a baseband frequency offset 1 In Baseband Baseband Offsets set Baseband Frequency Offset 1 Hz 2 In the Constellation Diagram select Configure The Graphics Configuration dialog opens 3 Add a vector diagram with signal acquisition point Stream and enlarge it The vector diagram rotates with 1 Hz Displaying baseband signal characteristics in real time ...

Page 437: ...am 4 Reset the baseband frequency offset to 0 Hz The vector diagram does not rotate any more To visualize the effect of the filter parameters on the generated signal 1 Select Baseband Custom Digital Mod Filter Roll Off Factor 0 99 The vector diagram changes Displaying baseband signal characteristics in real time ...

Page 438: ...hing for magnifying images on your cell phone If the diagram is zoomed an overview window appears 3 Move the visible area in the graphics or in the overview window 4 For the reverse operation select Zoom out To enable markers to readout exact measured data In an enlarged diagram 1 Select Show Marker Two markers appear one over the other 2 To position the markers select and shift them M2 M1 indicat...

Page 439: ...rkers 3 To hide the markers select Hide Marker To observe the effect of enabled additive noise AWGN 1 Select AWGN General Mode Additive Noise 2 Select AWGN General Min Noise System Bandwidth Ratio 3 3 Select Noise Power Output Results Carrier Noise Ratio 30 dB 4 Select AWGN State On Displaying baseband signal characteristics in real time ...

Page 440: ...e the default settings and select Save The instrument creates a screenshot of the current screen and stores it in a file with a predefined filename in the default user directory var user See Chapter 10 10 Creating screenshots of current settings on page 515 3 Use on of the standard file transfer methods to access the user directory of the instrument Transfer the file to a PC See Chapter 10 9 How t...

Page 441: ...instructions Synchronizing instruments 441 Generating time aligned baseband signals 441 Control and operation of external instruments 448 System configuration settings 455 Digital baseband input settings 470 I Q analog output settings 476 9 1 Synchronizing instruments For information on the possible scenarios concerning the distribution of reference fre quency test setups and the related settings ...

Page 442: ...e baseband clock and the trigger signal from it Secondary instruments can forward the received synchro nization signal Sync In and output it to trigger further secondary instruments Synchronization signal The synchronization signal is a 50 MHz signal that carries the trigger pulse modulated on it Hence it provides joint triggering and baseband clock synchronization at the same time Final time alig...

Page 443: ...and SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument STATe on page 717 Multi Instrument Trigger Sets the mode in that the instrument works To activate the mode set Multi Instrument State On Primary Provides its trigger signal to the secondary instruments Secondary Synchronizes to the supplied trigger signal from the primary instru ment Observe the Synchronisation State indication for information if the synchronizat...

Page 444: ...s to the related global connector settings With State On the synchronization signal is assigned per default as follows Multi Instrument Trigger Primary Connector User 6 Direction Output Signal Baseband Sync Out Multi Instrument Trigger Secondary Connector User 6 Direction Output Signal Baseband Sync Out Connector User 5 Direction Input Signal Baseband Sync In See also Chapter 9 2 1 2 How to connec...

Page 445: ...ment etc Note Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points Use cables of the same length and type for all connections between the primary instrument and the secondary instruments and between secondary instruments 2 To distribute the internal reference signal of one of the instruments in this example the primary instrument connect the instruments in a daisy chain concerning the reference fre...

Page 446: ...e baseband signal a Select the same trigger mode as in the primary instrument b Set Sync Out to Trigger On c Observe the automatically selected Trigger Source Baseband Sync In Once the baseband is activated the secondary instruments are triggered by the synchronization signal If the secondary instrument is R S SMM100A the trigger parameters of all base bands are coupled and all basebands use commo...

Page 447: ...y a defined trigger event The signal generation start can be controlled for example by triggering the instrument internally or externally from the DUT To share common trigger signal Let one R S SMM100A generate a dedicated signal that triggers all R S SMM100A instruments See Example Triggering several R S SMM100A instruments simultaneously on page 447 Connect all instruments to a common external t...

Page 448: ...ignals at 58 3 GHz require connected R S FSW or R S SZU The R S SMM100A provides all settings required to configure the output connectors to establish the connections to the connected RF instruments and to control them The settings are grouped in the System configuration External RF and I Q dialog In this dialog you find an overview of all available I Q input and output connectors and config ure t...

Page 449: ...S SZU icon To access the I Q modulator settings of the R S SZU select the I Q Mod block The R S SMM100A RF settings are dedicated to the R S SZU The corresponding RF output cannot be used for other application for example LO coupling As with other downstream instruments the frequency and level indications in the R S SMM100A status bar show the R S SZU values Parameters like the fre quency and leve...

Page 450: ... 5 Digital baseband input settings on page 470 External analog I Q I Q Mod Chapter 6 Applying I Q vector modulation on page 284 Input interface for the external digital baseband signal Two digital interfaces HS Dig I Q can be used as input for digital signals but not at the same time They provide direct communication with other Rohde Schwarz instru ments like Signal generators R S FSW signal and s...

Page 451: ...ator Baseband block and the external digital base band input BB Input The output of analog I Q Analog and digital I Q Digital signals 9 3 4 4 Important signal parameters and interface s characteristics Correct signal processing of the externally supplied input signals in the instrument and correct processing of the output signal in the next connected instrument require infor mation of signal param...

Page 452: ...ors the input and output digital signal and indi cates an overflow status Overflow of the input signal crest factor and peak level is indicated if the entered Peak Level in dB full scale value does not correspond to the real value Tip The overflow status is indicated as long as the signal level is not reduced and the peak level value corrected Trigger Auto Level Set to collect the required val ues...

Page 453: ...m Tip For a correct signal leveling 1 Enable an appropriate measurement time 2 Execute one measurement for each baseband source 3 Set the measurement period to a time value that is long enough to capture several periods of the input signal Determined automatically The R S SMM100A can receive the values from the connected transmitter If the external digital signal source is a second Rohde Schwarz i...

Page 454: ...rential output provides symmetrical signals for differential inputs of DUTs with out the need of additional external electric network To achieve an optimal and bal anced operating point of these inputs ensure the correct adjustment of the used DC voltage Bias and the offset Offset between inverting and non inverting output Refer to the descriptions Bias EMF and Offset EMF for a description of the ...

Page 455: ... settings The settings in this dialog comprise the I Q mapping and the processing of the gener ated I Q streams Form this dialog you can control and configure the connections to instruments connected to the RF and I Q connectors Required options The equipment layout includes Base unit Option differential analog I Q outputs R S SMM K17 Optional option frequency R S SMM B1006 For description of the ...

Page 456: ...m st STATe on page 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing BBMM ch STReam st STATe on page 717 9 4 2 External RF and I Q settings With the settings in the External RF and I Q tab you can control external devices and instruments from the R S SMM100A if all prerequisites are fulfilled See Prerequi sites for control of external instruments from the R S SMM100A on page 456 Prerequisites for control of exter...

Page 457: ...ts use The dialog provides access to some additional short information on each of the connected instruments It also provides a show connector function for an easy localization of the selected connector on the instrument front or rear panel Settings Connections configuration and connection status overview settings 457 External instrument configuration settings 462 9 4 2 1 Connections configuration ...

Page 458: ... however after a R S SMM100A startup you have to revise the test setup and perform the following Check whether the necessary connections between the R S SMM100A and the external instruments are still existing Prove that the remote control of the particular instruments is required Trigger the Connect All Remote function Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal ACONnect on page 720 Connect Disconnect ...

Page 459: ...ted external instru ments The R S SMM100A itself and the preset values The connected instruments Preset behavior Off On R S SMM100A and preset values Standard R S SMM100A preset See Table 10 1 Excluded from preset I Q Output Type See also Connection status Terminated Disconnect All Remote Unchanged Connected instruments External instrument preset DEVice PRESet External instrument preset Remote com...

Page 460: ...eference frequency of the R S SMM100A I Q Connection Depends on the interface type Analog I Q interfaces Selects the type of the I Q output signal Digital I Q interfaces Indicates the status of the I Q connection of the digital interfaces The indication includes a status LED and an icon where the icon depends on the connector Dig I Q or HS Dig I Q used Indication Designation green LED and an icon ...

Page 461: ...ONnection STATe on page 722 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote DISConnect on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INFO on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF RCONnection STATe on page 722 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF REMote DISConnect on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INFO on page 728 Instrument Name Displays useful information on the connected external instrume...

Page 462: ...RF POWer OFFSet on page 724 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF FREQuency on page 723 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF FREQuency OFFSet on page 723 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF POWer on page 724 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF POWer OFFSet on page 724 RF State With enabled RF Coupled parameter displays the RF output state of the connected external instrument The parameter is coupled to the state...

Page 463: ...tem Config System Configuration External RF and I Q External Instruments Config Settings Detect Scan 464 Clean Unused Clean All 464 External Instrument 464 Set Symbolic Name 465 Remote Channel 465 Hostname or IP Address 465 Device ID 465 RF Path 465 Frontend Configuration 466 Initialization Sequence 466 Remove Initialization Sequence 466 Apply 466 Apply and Connect 466 System configuration setting...

Page 464: ...supported instruments like Note The scan function searches throughout the entire network and can last several minutes Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN on page 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN STATe on page 725 Clean Unused Clean All Triggers the instrument to clean at once all unused LAN connections This function allows you to retrieve a new pool of valid instruments The C...

Page 465: ...uration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INFO on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INFO on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INFO on page 728 Hostname or IP Address Displays sets the hostname or IP address of the connected external instrument Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote ADD on page 726 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch REMote INFO on page 728 SCONfiguration EXTe...

Page 466: ...ile to reconfigure the external instrument If necessary perform further settings and configuration of the external instruments Remote command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote INITialization CATalog on page 729 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch REMote INITialization FILE on page 729 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INITialization FILE on page 729 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INITiali...

Page 467: ...cess 1 Select Taskbar System Config System Configuration External RF and I Q 2 Navigate to the required connector Select External Instruments Config 3 In the Dig Conn Name External Instrument Configuration dialog select Remote Control In this dialog you can send individual SCPI commands or a sequence of SCPI commands to the connected instruments The sent commands and their results are displayed in...

Page 468: ...0 File Sequence Send Sequence Accesses the standard File Select dialog for loading of user defined files with exten sion iec The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self explanatory When a file is selected its name and content are displayed and the first command is selected You can send the commands one by one Send Command or send the entire sequence at once Send Sequence After a c...

Page 469: ...he Dig Conn Name External Instrument Configuration dialog select Show Connector The dialog displays the location of the selected connector The Show Connector function triggers the instrument to identify the connector on the rear panel The LED next to the selected connector blinks 9 4 3 Overview Access To display an interactive overview diagram of the current configuration select Sys tem Configurat...

Page 470: ...devices Input and output signals like connected external baseband source to the digital input interface Hotspots for fast access to the required settings Several of the displayed elements are hotspots Select an element to access the rela ted dialog 9 5 Digital baseband input settings The R S SMM100A provides interfaces to feed an external digital baseband signal into the signal path Required optio...

Page 471: ...e digital baseband input interface HS Dig I Q 1 Digital input interface state gray inactive blue active 2 Connector name 2 To access the frequency offset settings select BB Input Baseband Offsets See Chapter 4 12 Shifting and boosting the baseband signal on page 257 3 To access the dialog box for configuring the external signal input select BB Input Digital I Q In Baseband Input Settings The Baseb...

Page 472: ...ource 473 Connected Device 473 State Enables the feeding of the selected external digital signals into the baseband Remote command SOURce hw BBIN STATe on page 741 Connector Defines the connector used as an external signal source Available are all digital input connectors as defined with System Configuration External RF and I Q Direction Input see Direction Remote command SOURce hw BBIN DIGital SO...

Page 473: ...he connection to the external device is properly established and signal transmission is active this parameter displays information on the instrument connected to the Dig I Q interface Name serial number and port of the connected instrument The transmitter sample rate if supported by the transmitter None indicates that no device is connected Remote command SOURce hw BBIN CDEVice on page 742 9 5 2 S...

Page 474: ...d the aggregated sample rate depending on the number of active channels observe the indication Aggregated Link Sample Rate Remote command SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 SRATe on page 744 Crest Factor Channel Table If DIG IQ Auto Setting Off sets the crest factor per channel Remote command SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 POWer CFACtor on page 743 Peak Level Channel Table If DIG IQ Auto Setting Off sets the ...

Page 475: ...w BBIN SRATe MAX on page 745 DIG IQ Auto Setting Activates an automatic adjustment of the baseband input signal The R S SMM100A receives peak level level and crest factor values directly from the connected transmitter and recognizes changes automatically Remote command SOURce hw BBIN DIGital ASETting STATe on page 745 Measurement Period Sets the recording duration for measuring the baseband input ...

Page 476: ... Q OUT connector in a folded state The analog out put connectors are inactive gray LEDs 1 2 3 Figure 9 5 Representation of the analog output interface 1 Analog output interface state gray inactive blue active 2 Analog output connector name 3 Mapped I Q stream To configure the I Q Analog Output settings 1 Select the I Q OUT symbol to unfold the I Q Analog block 2 To route or reroute the signal to t...

Page 477: ...bination of output voltage of the I and Q signal components and an optional bias voltage If the differential output is used an additional offset can be set too The values of these parameters are inter dependent so that the magnitude of the sum of output voltage and bias voltage must not exceed 4V The following applies Single ended signal Vp Vbias 4 V Differential signal 0 5 Vp Vbias 0 5 Voffset 4 ...

Page 478: ... 480 I Q Level Vp EMF 480 Couple I Q Bias 480 Bias EMF 480 Offset EMF 481 State Enables disables the analog I Q output Note By default these output connectors are deactivated Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog STATe on page 898 Set to Default Calls the default settings The values of the main parameters are listed in the following table Parameter Value State Not affected by the Set to Defaul...

Page 479: ...lope tracking testing The signal is output at the I I Bar connectors The envelope tracking ET is a method used by modern power amplifiers PA to improve their efficiency especially when amplifying high crest factor RF signals With envelope tracking the PA estimates i e tracks the RF signal and varies the supply voltage at the end amplifying stage synchronous to the changes in the RF signal See user...

Page 480: ...ion R S SMM K17 Enables modification of the I Q signal components settings Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog MODE on page 900 I Q Level Vp EMF In Mode Variable sets the output voltage for the I and Q signal components The value range is adjusted so that the maximum overall output voltage does not exceed 4V see Maximum overall output voltage on page 477 Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut LE...

Page 481: ...e is adjusted so that the maximum overall output voltage does not exceed 4V see Maximum overall output voltage on page 477 The selected offset is set half in the positive and half in the negative direction Effect of a positive offset Effect of a negative offset A positive offset is set with half of the value in posi tive direction at the non inverting outputs in nega tive direction at the invertin...

Page 482: ...lti instrument setups R S SMM100A 482 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet I on page 902 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet Q on page 902 I Q analog output settings ...

Page 483: ...information on how to save the displayed setting in a file refer to Chapter 10 10 Creating screenshots of current settings on page 515 About the file system 483 Restoring the default instrument configuration 486 Protecting data 492 Saving and recalling instrument settings 493 Accessing files with user data 498 Exporting and importing remote command lists 502 Loading importing and exporting lists 5...

Page 484: ...n page 498 Externally or internally generated complex modulation and control data can be loa ded in the instrument See Chapter 10 5 Accessing files with user data on page 498 Externally generated waveforms can be loaded in the Arbitrary Waveform Genera tion dialog See Chapter 4 6 Using the arbitrary waveform generator ARB on page 147 Depending on the data storage method user data can be Persistent...

Page 485: ...to a LAN supports two standard file transfer methods from a remote client FTP file transfer protocol File sharing according to the SAMBA SMB server message block protocol Both file transfer methods access the folder user that is the var user folder on the instrument For step by step description see Chapter 10 9 How to transfer files from and to the instrument on page 509 Map a network folder or a ...

Page 486: ...user correction data However if a list data is part of the instrument settings a reference to this list is saved not the list itself This approach ensures that the created files contain only relevant information and allows you to transfer instrument settings even between different equipped signal gen erators During the recall process the instrument interprets only the relevant settings all non ref...

Page 487: ...n It resets all parameters and switching states including also the states of inactive operating modes Network remote access or system settings are retained To execute a preset press the Preset key at the front panel Set to Default Set To Default relates to individual dialogs or tabs and resets the associated set tings of the corresponding dialog All other settings are retained For example you can ...

Page 488: ...nstrument state The reset functions set the parameters and operating modes to default values prede fined by the factory Alternatively to these default settings you can Define user specific recall settings to be restored after a preset see Chapter 10 2 3 How to recall user settings automatically after preset on page 490 Store and reload user defined instrument states see Chapter 10 4 2 How to save ...

Page 489: ...example SOURce hw BB Digital Standard PRESet Preset this Parameter Restores the default value of a single parameter Execute Factory Preset Resets the instrument to its factory settings Note Factory Preset retains all security settings and does not delete any user files like setups or user data See also Table 10 1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the correspond ing preset function...

Page 490: ...gs as a file with the predefined filename UserPreset savrcltxt Save this file in the directory var user The filename UserPreset savrcltxt and the directory var user are man datory Now when you press the Preset key or send the RST command to the instru ment the defined settings are restored An Info message appears and confirms that a file with user defined preset set ting is loaded 10 2 4 Reference...

Page 491: ...off x x Reference frequency settings reference oscillator x Power on settings Level EMF x Network settings x Hostname x GPIB address x Start Stop display update x Display and keyboard settings x Preset behavior Keep connections to external instru ments off x Password and settings protected by passwords e g dis abled LAN or USB Security settings User files setups2 data lists etc HUMS State off x HU...

Page 492: ...te protected Once you power off the instrument for at least five minutes all volatile memory modules lose their contents Instead you can redirect the user data to an external memory device as e g a USB stick See also Default storage location on page 484 Volatile Mode on page 566 Chapter 10 9 4 Using a USB storage device for file transfer on page 514 Save user files temporarily in the var volatile ...

Page 493: ...ument settings Save Recall in files with user defined names The defined set of instrument settings are saved to a definable storage location The file extension is savrcltxt Settings files created in this way are visible in the file system and accessible with the supported methods for file handling In the general case a recall process replaces the instruments settings with the saved values An excep...

Page 494: ...t Block Diagram Baseband EUTRA LTE General Save The name of the dialog is context sensitive and differs depending on the particular digital standard The provided functions are similar Settings Operation Mode 495 Directory File List and Filename 495 Recent files 495 Show SCPI List 495 SCPI List 495 Save 496 Save Immediate x 496 Exclude Frequency 496 Exclude Level 496 Recall 496 Recall Immediate x 4...

Page 495: ...tton see also Chapter 7 10 7 List editor on page 351 To perform standard file management functions like create directories move copy delete files and or directories use the standard File Manager function see Chap ter 10 8 Using the file manager on page 503 Remote command To list all files in a directory MMEMory CDIRectory on page 667 MMEMory CATalog on page 666 Refer to the description of firmware...

Page 496: ...57 Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL on page 890 Exclude Level The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL on page 943 Recall Restores the selected configuration During recall the instrument considers all relate...

Page 497: ...age location cannot be changed 3 Adapt the instrument settings as required Select Save Immediate 2 4 To restore the settings select the Operation Mode Recall 5 Select Recall Immediate 1 The instrument is restored to the previous state 6 Select Recall Immediate 2 to switch to the settings saved in the second file To save complete instrument settings 1 Select Save Rcl Operation Mode Save 2 In the fi...

Page 498: ...ion dialog select a filename and storage location for the settings file A file with the defined name and path and a predefined extension 3g is cre ated 3 Connect both instrument to a LAN Alternatively use a USB flash drive to transfer the created 3g file to the second instrument 4 In the second instrument select Baseband 3GPP FDD General Recall to load the saved file 5 Navigate in the file selecti...

Page 499: ... CCPCH Data Data List for example select DList Patt None A file select dialog for loading creating and modifying a file opens Tip The name of the dialog is context sensitive and differs depending on the par ticular function this dialog is from However the provided functions are similar 2 To load an existing file Navigate through the file system Select the file and confirm with Select 3 To create a...

Page 500: ...em The dialog name changes depending on the context The provided functions are self explanatory and similar Use the settings for example as follows To navigate through the file system use the directory tree To create a file load and save files use the dedicated functions New Select Save and Recent files To access the general data list editor use the Edit button see also Chapter 7 10 7 List editor ...

Page 501: ...ct OK use Cancel to undo the operation To edit the file content select File Select Edit Edit Accesses the Data List Editor and loads the selected file for editing See Chapter 4 5 3 7 Data list editor on page 128 Functions for handling of control lists Provided are the following standard functions for file handling Select Select and load the file Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CLISt SELect on page ...

Page 502: ...settings and create an executable script see Chapter 12 9 4 How to record create SCPI lists on page 639 Completed scripts are saved in files and possibly converted to different formats depending on the used language of the source code The R S SMM100A supports the following commonly used languages Plain SCPI txt MATLAB m NICVI c Python py It is also possible to convert the SCPI command list to a us...

Page 503: ...rd Windows Explorer It helps you man age mass storage media and files saved on the R S SMM100A You can perform the following tasks Copying multiple files from disk to other media See Chapter 10 9 How to transfer files from and to the instrument on page 509 Copying files into another directory See Cut Copy Paste and Delete Renaming and deleting files Creating directories See Create New Directory Ma...

Page 504: ...tions to rename delete copy or move individual files 10 8 1 File manager settings Access Select Save Rcl File Manager Settings Map Network Share 504 File Type 504 Directory and Filename 505 Cut Copy Paste and Delete 505 Rename 505 Create New Directory 505 Map Network Share Accesses the Map network share settings dialog where you can map one or more net work folders See also Chapter 10 8 4 How to m...

Page 505: ... Remote command MMEMory DELete on page 670 MMEMory COPY on page 667 Rename Renames the selected file or directory Remote command MMEMory MOVE on page 671 Create New Directory Creates a folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path absolute or rel ative to the current directory of the new folder Remote command MMEMory MDIRectory on page 671 10 8 2 Map network share settings Access Sele...

Page 506: ... Enter the path of the folder or computer e g IP Address user or server name user Local Folder Enter a letter or an alias name to describe the folder In the directory tree a mapped network folder is indicated as shares Local Folder User Name Enter a user name of a user that has the permission to access the selected network folder Password Enter the password of the selected user Reconnect at Startu...

Page 507: ...atile 10 8 4 How to map a network folder Possibly you would like to transfer instrument or user settings to another R S SMM100A distribute waveform files to several instruments or you have to access frequently the same network drive In these cases on a R S SMM100A connected to a LAN you can create a shortcut to this network folder or this computer How to see Chapter 12 7 3 How to connect to LAN on...

Page 508: ...eld enter IP Address user or Server Name user For example 10 124 0 170 user b In the Local Folder field enter an alias name e g setups c Enter the User Name and Password of a user with a remote access permis sion to the selected network folder d If necessary enable Reconnect at Startup e Select Connect The selected network folder is mapped to your instrument The list of mapped net work folders is ...

Page 509: ...er on page 503 On an instrument connected to a LAN Via one of the standard functions FTP or SMB samba See Chapter 10 9 2 Accessing the file system of the R S SMM100A via FTP on page 511 and Chapter 10 9 3 Accessing the R S SMM100A file system via SMB Samba on page 512 Via mapped network drives See Chapter 10 8 4 How to map a network folder on page 507 Via a connected USB storage device See Chapter...

Page 510: ...ction on the file system Enable the corresponding service or interface To enable write permission on the file system 1 Select System Config Setup Security Security General 2 Select Disk Memory 3 Enable Volatile Mode 4 Enter the Security Password The default password is 123456 For more information see Chapter 11 5 Using the security settings on page 562 The R S SMM100A requests a reboot 5 Confirm t...

Page 511: ... the R S SMM100A via FTP If the R S SMM100A is connected to a LAN you can use file transfer protocol FTP to access the file system and to transfer files from and to the instrument How to see Chapter 12 7 3 How to connect to LAN on page 620 To access the file system via FTP We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN 1 Enable file transfer via FTP 2 Enable write permissio...

Page 512: ...instrument There you can perform standard functions like creating directory or saving files 6 In the user directory create a directory e g test ftp 7 Select Save Rcl Open the var user directory The dialog displays the var user test ftp directory 10 9 3 Accessing the R S SMM100A file system via SMB Samba The SMB Samba protocol is an alternative way to access the file system of the instru ment from ...

Page 513: ... PC are connected to a LAN 1 Enable file transfer via SMB Samba 2 Enable write permission on the file system 3 On the remote PC start the Windows Explorer Open the Map Network Drive dialog a Select a valid Drive e g W b In the Folder field enter IP Address of the Instrument user or Hostname of the Instrument user For example 10 124 0 166 user or SMM100A 102030 user Tip The R S SMM100A indicates it...

Page 514: ...rage device To transfer a file with user data to the instrument 1 Connect a USB storage device for example a USB memory stick to one of the USB interfaces of the instrument The R S SMM100A recognizes the connected USB storage device automatically 2 Enable file transfer via USB 3 Enable write permission on the file system 4 Select Save Rcl The dialog displays the var user directory and the usb driv...

Page 515: ...y of the R S SMM100A you access the file server directly from the File Manager and under the same name e g shares Setups An extra advantage in remote control is that the same application program would control the instruments For example use the remote control command MMEMory CDIRectory shares Setups to set the default directory for mass storage 10 10 Creating screenshots of current settings The sa...

Page 516: ...File 517 Format 517 Options 517 Save 517 Hardcopy Options Common 517 Automatic Naming 517 Format 517 Region 518 Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming 518 Path 518 Clear Path 518 Prefix Year Month Day 518 Current Auto Number 519 Automatic Naming If enabled creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with the Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming settings Creating screenshots of cu...

Page 517: ...e 691 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage on page 691 Options Accesses Hardcopy Options dialog Save Saves a hardcopy of the current display as a file Remote command HCOPy EXECute on page 692 Hardcopy Options Common Access select Hardcopy Options Common With the provided settings you can customize the file format and the syntax of the automatically assigned filename Automatic Naming Hardcopy Options Common If en...

Page 518: ... specify also a filename Otherwise an error mes sage is displayed and selection is canceled Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory on page 693 Clear Path Hardcopy Options Automatic Naming Deletes all image files with extensions bmp jpg png and xmp in the direc tory set for automatic naming Before the command is executed a warning message prompts you to confirm the dele tion of the files Rem...

Page 519: ...utomatic Naming Indicates the number which is used in the automatically generated filename Note When initially switching on the instrument the number is reset to the lowest pos sible value Starting with number 0 the output directory is scanned for existing files As long as files with the same name are existing the number is increased by 1 The num ber is automatically set so that the resulting file...

Page 520: ... default directory var user b If necessary disable or change some of the parameters in the Automatic Nam ing Settings c Close the Hardcopy Options dialog 6 In the Hardcopy dialog select Save The instrument saves a hardcopy of the current instrument display as a jpg file The filename is automatically created 7 To print the hardcopy connect the instrument to a LAN and a Transfer the file to a remote...

Page 521: ...le and data management R S SMM100A 521 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 c Print the selected file For more information refer to the online help of the operating system Creating screenshots of current settings ...

Page 522: ...sed an additional option for the R S SMM100A you can enable it using a license key Chapter 10 2 Restoring the default instrument configuration on page 486 At any time you can restore a default configuration to start a measurement at a defined instrument state or set the instrument to factory preset Chapter 16 3 Performing maintenance tasks on page 1013 Special functions like calibration routines a...

Page 523: ...hots Chapter 11 1 2 Appearance settings on page 524 Set date and time for the system clock see Chapter 16 3 1 Date and time on page 1014 Configure and activate a Screen Saver Deactivate display update to improve performance see Chapter 11 1 3 Display update settings on page 525 Determine the state of the RF signal and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R S SMM100A see Chapter...

Page 524: ...oard are made Remote command DISPlay PSAVe STATe on page 685 Wait Time Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries are made Remote command DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff on page 685 USB Keyboard Layout Selects the language of an externally connected keyboard via USB The function assigns the corresponding keys automatically Remote command KBOard LAYout on page 6...

Page 525: ...age 684 Display Update is Disables the automatic refreshing of the displayed values Remote command DISPlay UPDate STATe on page 686 11 1 4 Defining the RF signal state on power on As additional functions for the level settings you can determine the state of the RF sig nal and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R S SMM100A Power On EMF settings Access Select RF RF Level Power ...

Page 526: ...ltage If disabled the level is displayed as a voltage over a 50 Ohm load Note The setting is not affected by an instrument preset Preset key or RST and the Save Recall function It is reset only by factory preset Remote command SOURce hw POWer EMF STATe on page 938 11 1 5 How to set the initial instrument settings This section describes how to set up the R S SMM100A initially 11 1 5 1 Setting the k...

Page 527: ... minutes The instrument turns off the display after the defined period of time 5 To reactivate the display tap the screen or press any key on the front panel To deactivate the screen saver 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select User Interface Display 3 Disable the Screen Saver state 11 1 5 3 Adjusting appearance of the user interface You can disable the snapshot preview of dialog in the taskbar 1 Press th...

Page 528: ... available signals are not dedicated to a particular connector but can be mapped to one or more globally shared User or local T M C connectors The signal mapping and the polarity the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the input connectors are configurable parameters The connectors settings are grou ped in the Global connectors settings and Local connectors settings dialogs For an overvie...

Page 529: ...Restart Option R S SMM K80 Output Baseband Marker 1 2 3 Baseband Sync Out Always 0 1 BER TestGen Data BER TestGen Clock BER TestGen Data Enable BER TestGen Restart Option R S SMM K80 User 4 5 6 Input Pulse In Output Signal Valid Signal Valid Neg Pulse Out Pulse Sync Pulse Video User 6 Input Feedback Output Manual Trigger 11 2 2 2 Baseband local connectors Apart from the multipurpose global User co...

Page 530: ...s green an input connector yellow an output connector no light gray the connector is not active T M C status LEDs For quick overview of the source internal external of the used trigger marker and clock signals the block diagram displays T M C status LEDs on the left side of the Baseband block If the baseband generator is active a dedicated LED indicates the status green an external signal is used ...

Page 531: ...ew of the current mapping of the logical signals to the connectors as configured in the Global Connectors and Local Con nectors dialogs Clicking the connector name directly accesses the related connec tor settings The dialog consists of several tabs each tab corresponds to one of the available basebands 2 Use the built in Show Connector function to display the physical location of the selected con...

Page 532: ...ctor As selected in the Global Connectors dialog As selected in the Local Connectors dialog Dedicated RF connectors like LO In Out or Inst Trig Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument A blinking LED on the front rear panel indicates the selected connector too see Chap ter 11 2 2 4 Status indicators on ...

Page 533: ...fig Setup RF Connectors The RF Connectors dialog gives an overview of the mapping of the logical signals to the connectors the displayed connectors depend on the installed options The signal assignment to the dedicated RF connectors for example LO In Out or Inst Trig is fixed Selecting a connector name accesses directly the related connector settings 2 Select the Signal name to access the dialog w...

Page 534: ...onnector As selected in the Global Connectors dialog As selected in the Local Connectors dialog Dedicated RF connectors like LO In Out or Inst Trig Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front rear panel of the instrument A blinking LED on the front rear panel indicates the selected connector too see Chap ter 11 2 2 4 Status indicators...

Page 535: ... Trigger In Marker or Clock tab of the corre sponding digital standard In the Block Diagram select the T E P V status LEDs to access the RF Connectors dialog and select a global User connector The Global Connectors dialog comprises the settings necessary to configure the signal to connector routing and the physical characteristics of the input connectors for trigger clock and control signals 2 Use...

Page 536: ...vailable control signals Global Trigger 1 2 Input for triggering custom digital modulations digital standards and ARB A trigger event affects the signal generation in all basebands for which the Global Trigger signal is enabled Global Clock 1 2 Input for external clock signal for synchronizing the internal clocks in all basebands to an externally applied clock signal The active edge can be configu...

Page 537: ...ync Out Baseband Sync In Option R S SMM B9 Signals available in enabled primary secondary instrument mode Baseband Sync Out One or more outputs of a dedicated synchronization and trigger signal that has to be fed into the slave instruments Baseband Sync In In the slave instruments at most one input for the synchronization and trigger signal Can be assigned to any global connector See also Chapter ...

Page 538: ...r LEVel on page 737 SOURce INPut USER CLOCk LEVel on page 737 Threshold User4 6 Input Threshold Pulse Input Sets the high low threshold in volts for the signal at the User4 6 connectors The input signal is defined with the parameter Signal The same threshold applies for all 3 connectors and any input signal e g external pulse modulation or trigger signal Remote command SOURce INPut USER PULM LEVel...

Page 539: ...nnector or Select Local Connector Settings Select Baseband Custom Digital Modulation Trigger In Local Connector Settings or respectively the Trigger In Marker or Clock tab of the corre sponding digital standard The Local Connectors dialog comprises the settings necessary to route the sig nals to the local connectors and to determine the physical characteristics of the input connectors for trigger ...

Page 540: ...put is selected by the parameter Direction Refer to Table 11 2 for an overview of the available control signals Data Input for external serial data signal Baseband A Marker 1 A broad selection of suitable marker signals is offered in the Marker tab of the corresponding digital standard Symbol Clock A Output of the internal clock signal used for digital modulations The signal is generated automatic...

Page 541: ...orm signal to connector mapping This section introduces the general principle of connector configuration General Workflow The Figure 11 1 shows the main configuration stages together with the corresponding user interface dialogs Figure 11 1 The principle of the signal to connector mapping To perform the signal to connector mapping perform the following 1 Verify the current connector configuration ...

Page 542: ...ctions or to group frequently used settings in one dialog You can collect the parameters of your configuration in a favorites list i e in the User Menu or define settings and actions with the User key User Menu to group settings of specific tasks Similar to a favorites function you can use this menu for Grouping the settings required for a task in one dialog Saving and recalling the settings of a ...

Page 543: ...tailed description refer to Chapter 10 4 Saving and recalling instrument settings on page 493 Recall Setup function If the Recall Setup is the only user action assigned to the User key pressing this key triggers the R S SMM100A to load the user defined preset file immedi ately Recalling a user defined preset file using the User key is even faster than the immediate recall function provided by the ...

Page 544: ... instructions on how to use the User Menu 2 If you already have a saved user menu file on the instrument you can load with Recall User Menu Creating a User Menu To create your own user dialog with settings 1 Open a dialog with settings you frequently use 2 Select a parameter 3 Open the context menu and select Add to User Menu A favorites icon indicates that the parameter is used in the User Menu O...

Page 545: ...the User Menu or in the dialog where it originally belongs to a Open the context menu and select Remove from User Menu 6 To remove all entries at once select Clear User Menu 7 To save your individual favorites list select Save User Menu and follow the file managing instructions The file system automatically assigns the file extension user_menu 8 To recall a previously saved user menu select Recall...

Page 546: ...es functions to define new edit or remove existing actions If no actions have been defined the list is empty See Chapter 11 3 4 How to assign actions to the User key on page 547 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 13 9 DISPlay subsystem on page 684 Name Enters a user defined name for the action Wizard Defines the action to be executed Load SCPI Script Sel...

Page 547: ...tion displays the corresponding SCPI command with the associated parameter for dialog identification dialog ID The automatically displayed SCPIs are enabled for subsequent modification Remote command DISPlay DIALog OPEN on page 687 See also DISPlay DIALog ID on page 687 Add Change Remove Standard functions for managing of the actions Back to Execute Mode Opens the Select Action to Execute dialog S...

Page 548: ...y 3 To create an action a Specify the Name E g LTE_ShowTimePlanDL b Select Wizard Open Dialog c Select Select and select the dialog ID from the list The corresponding SCPI command is automatically displayed and can be later modified 4 Select Add to store the new action in the list of user key actions 5 To execute the created action press User In the list of actions Select Action to Execute dialog ...

Page 549: ...riod of time as needed An option is ready to operate after it is enabled with a license keycode supplied with the option The license key is delivered as a file or on paper Unregistered licenses must be registered for a particular instrument before the corresponding option can be enabled for operation For reliable operation a software option usually requires the latest firmware version The required...

Page 550: ...ing the occupied period you do not necessarily need permanent access to the license server If you need the option for a longer time than you have occupied you can extend the requested occupation period up to 7 days When the occupation period elapses the license expires automatically and the option is available again on the license server You cannot return or disable the license of an option manual...

Page 551: ... available number of an option the license type and registration You can query inactive or disabled options also 3 Select Open License Server See Chapter 11 4 2 Using the license server on page 556 4 Select Manage Waveform Packages This tab enables you to select and register purchased waveform packages 5 Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys Occupy Licenses Managing li...

Page 552: ...erver see Chapter 11 4 2 Using the license server on page 556 Settings Device ID 552 Enter License Key 553 Import License Key from File 553 Export Deactivation Response to File 553 License Installation Info 553 Installed License Keys 553 Show Inactive 553 Show Deactivated 553 Installed License Keys Table 553 Open License Server 554 Manage Waveform Packages 554 Number of Licenses Waveforms 554 Sele...

Page 553: ... on the performed actions Installed License Keys Access select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys Installed License Keys Comprises information on the installed options Show Inactive Installed License Keys Enables the display of the inactive expired licenses in the Installed License Keys Table Show Deactivated Installed License Keys Enables the display of the deactivated li...

Page 554: ...rm file gen erated with the R S WinIQSIM2 software even if it is not equipped with the corre sponding digital standard option for using R S WinIQSIM2 R S SMM K2xy K4xy Note One waveform packages license per waveform is required and for multisegment waveforms you need a license per segment Once registered license cannot be moved to another instrument A waveform packages license does not allow R S S...

Page 555: ...ime periods for their use To occupy or renew a license select Occupy Option Remote command SOURce OCCupy OPTion CATalog on page 931 License Info Occupy Licenses Displays the current occupancy state of the selected option instrument option Short name of the option designation Long name of the option All from Server no Number of options available on all connected license servers Occupied no Number o...

Page 556: ...nse Server either in a browser and also directly in the R S SMM100A The onboard license server integrated in the instrument firmware has connection to a local smartcard memory The local smartcard holds local licenses i e licenses that are intended for use on this specific instrument As opposed to local licenses the application also manages licenses referred to as floating licenses For managing flo...

Page 557: ...h local and floating licenses are available the application lists the internal license server of the R S SMM100A and the remote license server as R S SMM FL in the License providers tile The License Analytics and Configuration views enable you to activate licenses or e g deactivate and release floating licenses again In the License Info tile on the right the application shows the characteristics o...

Page 558: ...der e g R S SMM FL The license server shows the license key list with the options available for the selected provider In this example the floating licenses on the remote server 4 Select the option license summary view This view lists the options the number of available licenses and the state of their use In the last column you can see the maintenance expiration date of each license 5 To request en...

Page 559: ...o extend the occupation period for an option in use on page 560 1 Access Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys Occupy Licenses The table displays one row per option even if more than one license is available Column All Licenses from Server shows the number of free licenses 2 To access the configuration dialog select Occupy Option in the corresponding row The subdialog ...

Page 560: ...n time select the option in section Renew Occupation Period 3 Set the required time e g 4 days The maximum period is 7 days 11 4 4 How to move a portable license This example is intended to explain how to perform the required steps at the instru ment Use a USB flash drive to transfer the license key files between the instruments and the browser We assume knowledge about the handling of the R S Lic...

Page 561: ...om file and a Select the exported license key b Check the selection c Create the deactivation key d Save it to file 7 On the source instrument select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys New Licence Import License Keys from File Select the transferred deactivation key 8 On the source instrument select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Manage License Keys New Licence Ex...

Page 562: ...respective levels Protection level 1 Protects against accidental changes like for example the clock and date several internal adjustments functions and the self test as well as network settings or the instrument hostname You can access this level with the password 123456 Protection level 2 Unlocks protected service functions It is accessible to authorized personnel of Rohde Schwarz service departm...

Page 563: ...ent on page 571 LAN services secure controlled network access You can individually lock and unlock supported LAN interface services Also you can activate and deactivate SMB client and SMB server that use versions 1 0 and 2 0 of the SMB protocol See Chapter 11 5 3 Configuring LAN services on page 569 Remote control via the LAN interface requires that the interface is activated Once the interface is...

Page 564: ...in clear the checkbox Remote command SYSTem PROTect ch STATe on page 970 11 5 2 Setting security parameters Access Select System Config Setup Security Security General In the General tab you can determine the security level for firmware updates and configure the security settings for the mass memory and manual operation All modified settings in this dialog are not applied until you enter the Secur...

Page 565: ...s for details on signature verification when installing new or former firmware versions available at www rohde schwarz com firmware smm100a Confirm Unsigned Performs the signature verification If the check detects any discrepancies the instrument issues a warn ing message You can still update the firmware or reject updating This setting also enables you to downgrade the firmware version All Packag...

Page 566: ...e instrument returns a warning message Volatile Mode Activates volatile mode so that no user data can be written on the internal memory permanently In volatile mode Data that the instrument normally stores on the internal memory is redirected to volatile memory The user directory is mapped to the volatile memory You access the temporary data just as data stored in the var user see Chapter 10 3 Pro...

Page 567: ...mation on the security concept Remote command SYSTem SECurity SANitize STATe on page 979 11 5 2 3 Manual operation security settings Access Select System Config Setup Security Security General Manual Opera tion The SW Update tab enables you to lock front panel operation and or reading the display The remote commands available to control security settings are described in Chapter 13 9 DISPlay subsy...

Page 568: ...ent indicates the locked touchscreen by an icon Unlocking is possible via VNC external controls or remote control VNC Only Locks the keys at the front panel the touchscreen and externally con nected keyboard and mouse The display on the screen remains and shows the current settings and changes The instrument indicates the activated VNC only feature by the icon Unlocking is possible via VNC or turn...

Page 569: ...nstead How to unlock see Unlocking reactivating the user interface for manual operation on page 576 Remote command SYSTem ULOCk on page 968 SYSTem DLOCk on page 967 SYSTem KLOCk on page 967 Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation Follow the instructions listed in Unlocking reactivating the user interface for manual operation on page 576 Remote command SYSTem ULOCk on page 968 SYSTem ...

Page 570: ...rface services individually SCPI over LAN Activates access over LAN to control the instrument remotely by using SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands See also Starting a remote control session over LAN with R S VISA on page 628 VNC Activates access over VNC Virtual Network Computing interface a graphical desktop sharing system that uses RFB protocol to control the instrument...

Page 571: ...1 0 and 2 0 of the SMB protocol Support of version 1 0 and 2 0 is additional to the current SMB protocol version sup ported in the firmware This firmware supports SMB protocol versions up to version 4 SMB 1 0 2 0 Client Samba Services Activates support of the SMB client compatible with SMB protocol versions 1 0 and 2 0 SMB 1 0 2 0 Server Samba Services Activates support of the SMB server compatibl...

Page 572: ... System Config Setup Security Security Password Management Security Password How to Changing the default user password of the instrument on page 574 Changing the default security password on page 575 User Name Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for VNC FTP and SMB Samba access Using the security settings ...

Page 573: ...Password Confirms the new user password by repeating How to Changing the default user password of the instrument on page 574 Changing the default security password on page 575 Change Password User Password Changes the user password accordingly Security Password Access select System Config Setup Security Security Password Management Security Password Enables you to change and confirm the security p...

Page 574: ...e USB and LAN interface To prevent unauthorized access use the following configurations exclusively or com plementary Changing the default user password of the instrument on page 574 Changing the default security password on page 575 Disabling the LAN interface on page 575 Disabling LAN services on page 575 Activating SMB version 1 0 2 0 client and server on page 575 Disabling the frequency and le...

Page 575: ...er the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields d Select Change Password Disabling the LAN interface 1 Select System Config Setup Security Security LAN Services Main Ser vices 2 Select LAN Off All LAN connections and hence all LAN services are disabled Disabling LAN services 1 Select System Config Setup Security Security LAN Services Main Ser vices 2 Select for example FTP Off ...

Page 576: ...he screen shuts off and displays a padlock symbol instead There are further possible configurations For details see User Interface on page 568 Unlocking reactivating the user interface for manual operation 1 In manual operation a On the instrument s keypad or external keyboard press any key The instrument prompts you to enter the security password for unlocking If you press the character of the fi...

Page 577: ...ns in reverse order as previously performed Depending on the available memory the Undo Redo steps may restore all actions Multiple steps at once Select any specific action in the history list to Undo Redo multiple actions in a sin gle step Note This mode requires a system restoration file on the instrument Access Select Setup Settings Undo Redo The dialog contains all functions for enabling the Un...

Page 578: ... subsequently executed action you can restore all the actions undone up to this state 11 7 Shutting down and rebooting the instrument On the front panel the On Standby key switches the instrument from the standby to the ready state or vice versa In remote operation from a remote computer or in manual control there is another possibility to shut down the instrument or to reboot the system Access Se...

Page 579: ...ollowing descriptions provide information required for operating the R S SMM100A remotely The information applies to all applications and operating modes supported by the instrument Definitions specified in the SCPI standard are not provided For basic knowledge on remote control operation and additional information see the following documents available on the Rohde Schwarz website Remote control v...

Page 580: ...The protocol allows simultaneous operation from several remote devices and the instrument nevertheless remains locally operable The GUI is visible To perform the settings you can operate the instrument as with the manual control During remote operation via VNC the direct control of the instrument is not dis abled You can control the instrument from the front panel and via the remote computer alter...

Page 581: ...es from and to the instrument on page 509 Activating SMB version 1 0 2 0 client and server on page 575 12 2 Remote control interfaces and protocols The instrument supports various interfaces for remote control Table 12 2 gives an overview on the connectivity Table 12 2 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols VISA address string and library Remarks Local area network LAN HiSLIP ...

Page 582: ...escribes how to configure the remote control interfaces LAN interface 582 USB interface 584 GPIB interface IEC IEEE bus interface 585 LXI browser interface 586 12 2 1 LAN interface To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols For remote control the PC and the instrument must be connected over the LAN inte...

Page 583: ...ter the System Config Remote Access Network IP Address Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation The following section lists the characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corre sponding interface protocols The emphasized characters determine the protocol For description of the interface protocols control commands and messages refer to Remote control via SCPI HiSLIP TCPIP hos...

Page 584: ...e Schwarz instrument automatically when the USB connection is established You do not have to install a separate driver USBTMC USB Test Measurement Class Specification is a protocol that is built on top of USB for communication with USB devices It defines class code information of the instrument that identifies its functionality to load the respective device driver Using VISA library the protocol s...

Page 585: ...be connected with a GPIB bus cable A GPIB bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the used programming language must be installed on the control ler For description of the characteristics control commands and messages of the GPIB interface refer to Remote control via SCPI GPIB address The controller PC addresses the instrument with the GPIB bus channel see Chap ter 12 5 3 GPIB addr...

Page 586: ...e instrument s LXI browser interface descri bed in Chapter 12 6 2 1 LAN configuration on page 614 12 3 Remote control programs and libraries This section shows how the remote control programs access the instrument and the libraries they require for the corresponding interface protocols Figure 12 2 Overview of remote control interfaces protocols and libraries Possible setups and access functions Th...

Page 587: ...ontrol program Socket viOpen TCPIP SMM100A 102030 5025 SOCKET viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n VXI 11 viOpen TCPIP SMM100A 102030 inst0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n HiSLIP viOpen TCPIP SMM100A 102030 hislip0 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n USBTMC viOpen USB 0x0AAD 0x0277 100001 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n GPIB viOpen GPIB 28 INSTR viPrintf SOUR FREQ 2GHz n Remote control programs and libraries ...

Page 588: ...rotocol Remote control program Socket rssmm_init TCPIP SMM100A 102030 5025 SOCKET rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 VXI 11 rssmm_init TCPIP SMM100A 102030 inst0 INSTR rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 HiSLIP rssmm_init TCPIP SMM100A 102030 hislip0 INSTR rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 USBTMC rssmm_init USB 0x0AAD 0x0277 100001 INSTR rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 GPIB rssmm_init GPIB 28 INSTR rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 Remote control progr...

Page 589: ...2e9 GPIB rssmm_init GPIB 28 INSTR rssmm_SetFrequency 2e9 12 4 Status reporting system The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue You can query both with the commands of the STATus subsystem 12 4 1 Hierarchy of the status registers The ...

Page 590: ...andard Event Status Summary Bit MAV Message Available in Output Queue QUES Questionable Status Summary Bit 2 Error Event Queue 1 0 not used Note This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register The R S SMM100A uses the following status registers Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE see Chapter 12 4 3 Sta tus byte STB and service request enable register SRE on page 593 S...

Page 591: ...TB and thus is represented in the overview Error Event Queue The error event queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the past When reading the queue the instrument starts with the first occurred error event All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according...

Page 592: ...acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition par...

Page 593: ...nstrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in th...

Page 594: ...SE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ...

Page 595: ...r use the query commands STAT QUEST COND or STAT QUEST EVEN Table 12 5 Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register Bit No Meaning 0 15 Not used 12 4 6 Operation status register STATus OPERation This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by the instrument while the event part contains information on the actions performed by the instrument sinc...

Page 596: ...mmand OPC to generate an SRQ ESE 1 set bit 0 of ESE Operation Complete SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropri...

Page 597: ...gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 12 4 8 Reset values of the status reporting system The following table contains the different commands and events causing ...

Page 598: ...y when replacing an instrument we recommend that you select the emulation command set for the corresponding signal generator You find the remote control command sets supported by the R S SMM100A in a selec tion list The selected instrument also defines the identification string that is retrieved with query IDN If necessary use the parameter Mode and IDN String to change this string As any other pa...

Page 599: ...blems Note This function restarts only the connection of the instrument to the network It does not impact the network itself Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart on page 973 Hostname Displays the hostname Each instrument is delivered with an assigned hostname a logical name which can be used instead of the IP address With the default network settings the IP address is allocated by the...

Page 600: ...atically If the network does not support DHCP or the attempt does not succeed the instrument tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf APIPA protocol IP addresses assigned via Zeroconf start with the number blocks 169 254 Note An IP address that is assigned via the Zeroconf protocol although the network requires an IP address assigned via the DHCP server can cause network connection failures See...

Page 601: ...STem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon DOMain on page 973 DNS Server Determines the preferred server for name resolution The DNS server contains the underlying numerical values that are required for name resolution of the hostname as part of the IP address To select the DNS server manually select Address Mode Static Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS on page 974 MAC Address Indicates...

Page 602: ...the visa resource string for remote control over LAN See also Chapter 12 2 1 LAN interface on page 582 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource on page 973 Socket Displays the visa resource string for remote control over LAN using the socket com munication protocol See also Chapter 12 2 1 LAN interface on page 582 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource on page 976 GPIB Display...

Page 603: ...Config Remote Access GPIB Address The GPIB Address enables you to select the channel for remote control over the IEC IEE bus interface The remote command to configure the setting remotely is described in Chapter 13 17 SYSTem subsystem on page 960 Settings GPIB Channel Address 603 GPIB Channel Address Sets the GPIB IEC IEEE bus channel address for the connected instrument Remote command SYSTem COMM...

Page 604: ...tically when the USB connection is established The remote commands required to configure the parameters remotely are described in Chapter 13 17 SYSTem subsystem on page 960 Settings Baud Rate Sets the baudrate for the serial remote control interface Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD on page 975 Parity Sets the parity for the serial remote control interface Remote command SYSTem COMMuni...

Page 605: ...fine the IDN String and the OPT String Remote command SYSTem IDENtification on page 977 Set to Default In Mode User Defined resets the IDN and OPT strings Remote command SYSTem IDENtification PRESet on page 977 IDN String Indicates the identification string of the instrument when queried with the common command IDN In addition to the preset values you can define your own identification string so t...

Page 606: ...The Active tab shows the currently active remote connections and you can enable the display of the active connections in the task bar Show Remote Connections in Taskbar Displays the currently active connections in the taskbar SCPI Connections Displays the VISA resources strings of the remote connections currently controlling the instrument via the LAN interface Remote command n a TCP IP Connection...

Page 607: ...able the display of the active connections in the task bar SCPI Connections Lists the VISA resource strings of the last remote connections that have accessed the instrument via the LAN interface before Remote command n a TCP IP Connections Lists the types and client addresses of the last remote connections that had accessed the instrument via the LAN interface before Remote command n a 12 5 7 HUMS...

Page 608: ...es HUMS Data is only recorded if HUMS is activated If deactivated already recorded data can still be retrieved The setting is reset by a factory preset to off Remote command DIAGnostic HUMS STATe on page 682 Enhanced Settings Opens a dialog for configuring enhanced protocol settings see Chapter 12 5 8 HUMS enhanced settings on page 609 Access is only available when HUMS is activated see State Dele...

Page 609: ...HUMS Enhanced HUMS Settings The dialog provides enhanced settings for configuring protocol settings Protocol settings 609 SNMP 609 REST 610 SNMPv2 Configuration 610 Access 610 Community 610 Protocol settings Provides settings to configure protocols used for HUMS SNMP Protocol settings Enables the SNMP agent and selects the supported SNMP version The setting is reset by a factory preset to v1 v2c O...

Page 610: ... For read access you can use Read or Read Write For write access use Read Write The setting is reset by a factory preset to Read Write Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RO on page 683 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW on page 683 Community SNMPv2 Configuration Protocol settings Defines the SNMP community string that can be a group of instruments with SNMP version 2 support The se...

Page 611: ...web browser to perform the following tasks Modifying network configurations see Chapter 12 6 2 1 LAN configuration on page 614 Accessing the instrument remotely Monitoring the use and status of the instrument This service requires option R S SMM K980 Health and utilzation monitoring ser vice HUMS Analyzing SCPI remote diagnostics 12 6 1 LXI status settings Access Select System Config Setup Remote ...

Page 612: ...e TCP IP mode DHCP Auto IP address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LAN reset also resets the following parameters for the vector signal generator Parameter Hostname Instrument specific hostname Description Vector signal generator Negotiation Auto detect VXI 11 discovery Enabled 12 6 2 LXI browser settings The LXI browser functionality enables you ...

Page 613: ... Ping client on page 616 Status displays information about the LXI status of the instrument Utilities provides access to the LXI event logging functionality required by the LXI standard Instrument Control Web Control provides remote access to the instrument see Starting a remote control via the LXI web browser on page 624 Diagnostics SCPI Remote Trace records messages exchanged via the remote cont...

Page 614: ...guration mode for the IP address of the instru ment With static configuration the entered IP address subnet mask and default gate way are used With dynamic configuration DHCP or dynamic link local addressing automatic IP is used to obtain the instrument IP address Changing the LAN configuration This function is password protected Unlock the protection level 1 to access it Note We recommend that yo...

Page 615: ... can ping other hosts from the instru ment even if the setting is disabled VXI 11 Discovery Must be enabled to detect the instrument in the LAN If you disable this setting the instrument cannot be detected by the VXI 11 discov ery protocol mechanism The setting does not affect other detection mechanisms Setting up a VXI 11 connection via the IP address or the host name is independent of this setti...

Page 616: ...ress of the host in the Destination Address field for example 10 113 1 151 2 Select Submit 12 6 2 2 SCPI remote trace The remote trace functionality allows you to trace input and output strings at the remote control interface of the R S SMM100A see Chapter 12 8 8 How to trace messages with the LXI web browser interface on page 632 A recorded trace message log can be evaluated directly in the dialo...

Page 617: ...l database and displays it Download stores the SCPI trace log to a csv file Clear deletes all message log entries in the database and at the screen Details displays details of the selected message for example an SCPI command in hex format also possible by double clicking a message Columns The following columns are available if no column filter is applied Rec record number of the message within the...

Page 618: ... information on remote accesses over SCPI commands web browsers or protocols as for example SNMP or REST For detailed information on R S HUMS see the following documents available on the Rohde Schwarz website User manual R S Health and Utilization Monitoring Service describing how to access and use the service Application note GFM336 Instrument Health Utilization Monitoring providing information o...

Page 619: ...ngle computer For addressing both the instrument and the computer require an IP address The address information is usually assigned to the devices automatically see Chap ter 12 7 4 How to assign the IP address on page 620 How to enable access via LAN 619 How to activate LAN services 620 How to connect to LAN 620 How to assign the IP address 620 How to use computer names hostnames 621 12 7 1 How to...

Page 620: ...onfiguring the network Changing IP addresses 2 Connect the LAN socket on the rear panel via an RJ 45 cable to the LAN The R S SMM100A displays its IP address on the screen 12 7 4 How to assign the IP address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways If the network supports DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol the ad...

Page 621: ...rk administrator If you use more than one LAN connector you need separate address information for each connec tor For information on how to perform the configurations refer to the documentation of the operating system the computer uses 12 7 5 How to use computer names hostnames In a LAN that uses a DNS server each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer na...

Page 622: ...ver the available interfaces The following general prerequisites must be fulfilled The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and switched on See Chapter 12 7 Connecting the instrument to the network LAN on page 619 To operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the defined interface address See Chapter 12 2 1 LAN interface on page 582 C...

Page 623: ...the VISA resource string Select System Config Remote Access VISA Resource Strings The dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control interfaces Note Using the RS232 serial interface via USB requires the USB serial adapter R S TS USB1 12 8 2 How to change the GPIB instrument address To control the instrument remotely via the GPIB bus it must be addressed using the GPIB ...

Page 624: ...s of the R S SMM100A in the browser s address bar The R S SMM100A s welcome page is displayed 5 In the navigation pane select Instrument Control Web Control Remote access to the instrument requires the password The default password is instrument 6 Enter the password and confirm with the Enter key After the connection is established the current screen of the R S SMM100A is dis played in the browser...

Page 625: ...figuration protocol If this configuration is used enter the computer name in the position of the IP address 1 On the instrument a Enable the LAN interface See Chapter 12 7 1 How to enable access via LAN on page 619 b Enable SCPI over LAN See Chapter 12 7 2 How to activate LAN services on page 620 2 On the controller remote PC install the R S VISA program See http www rohde schwarz com rsvisa RS VI...

Page 626: ...R S VISA scans the network for connected instruments and lists all detected instruments in the Resource list Note The search may take some time particularly in large networks 8 Select the required instrument and confirm with Select The Find and select resource dialog closes and R S VISA indicates the IP address in the Resource field of the main application window 9 As an alternative to the IP addr...

Page 627: ...s shown in the figure and confirm with OK The Alias name is assigned d Close the dialog The R S SMM100A is registered in the program It can be addressed via the resource string or alias name 10 In the main window select Connect R S VISA establishes the connection to the R S SMM100A You can send settings to configure the instrument and receive its responses Note If the connection cannot be set up R...

Page 628: ...25 2 In the R S VISA Basics tab enter a SCPI command e g IDN Confirm with Query The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the controller 3 Select Read to obtain the instrument response Tip If the Show Log checkbox is checked R S VISA displays each VISA func tion call in the log view on the left If you check the Write Log checkbox the log view entry is written to ...

Page 629: ...633 Tip Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument settings 12 8 5 Establishing a remote control connection over LAN using socket communication This section provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over Telnet client and a simple sockets based program example that can be further devel oped See also Chapter A 1 Te...

Page 630: ...via Tel net Tip The R S SMM100A uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Tel net The connection to the instrument is set up and you can send remote control com mands 4 Telnet does not reflect your first entry Insert a command e g IDN and confirm with Enter 5 Observe the screen A response on the query confirms that the connection is working The client dis plays all subsequent inputs and ...

Page 631: ...Connect instrument and controller using a GPIB cable Switch them on 2 Select System Config Remote Access GPIB Address GPIB Channel Address 28 The GPIB address of the instrument must be the default value of 28 3 Execute the following commands on the controller a Open the port to the instrument CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator b Inform the controller about instrument address CALL IBPAD generator 28 c Rese...

Page 632: ... level viPrintf SOUR POW 20dBm n The RF frequency and signal level of the instrument are changed 3 To return to manual operation press the Local key 12 8 8 How to trace messages with the LXI web browser interface The remote trace functionality allows you to trace commands and messages exchanged via a remote control interface of the R S SMM100A Activating the SCPI remote trace 1 On the instrument a...

Page 633: ...one of the following On the controller use the command GTL Note If NREN has been set before GTL is locked Use GTR instead In the status bar select the Remote icon On the front panel press the Local key In the block diagram select Context sensitive menu Key Emulation Local 2 To return from Remote LLO state to manual or to Remote state perform one of the following Note In the local lockout state the...

Page 634: ...ript manually use a suitable editor on the controller Even for manually creating the instru ment supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax and the current settings value Directly in the instrument you can create a SCPI list at any time of operation in the following ways Recording steps Both automatic and manual SCPI recording of settings is possible You can start stop and resume aut...

Page 635: ...nd the instrument offers two ways to figure it out quickly Show SCPI command context sensitive menu Displays the SCPI command syntax of a selected parameter including the current setting value see Finding out the SCPI command using Show SCPI Command on page 643 The Copy function enables you to write a SCPI script conveniently by hand Instrument help Help key Opens a help topic that describes the s...

Page 636: ...port settings on page 637 Executing a SCPI script A SCPI script primarily runs on the controller PC In addition you can execute a script directly on the instrument by assigning the script to the User key See Chapter 11 3 4 How to assign actions to the User key on page 547 12 9 1 Show SCPI command Access 1 Select the parameter 2 Open the context sensitive menu tap and hold 3 Select Show SCPI Comman...

Page 637: ...SCPI Recording List Lists the automatically or manually recorded recorded SCPI commands Export Opens the SCPI Recording Export dialog for configuring the file parameters for export Remove All Remove First Remove Last Deletes either the first the last or all recorded SCPI commands To remove several recorded commands repeat the removing For post processing export the SCPI command list in a file see ...

Page 638: ...I or Python User Code Generator Use this setting to convert a script by a user specific code generator Select Code Template Opens the standard File Select dialog and lists the predefined or user defined code templates See Chapter 10 5 1 File select settings on page 499 File Opens the standard file select dialog Select Output File see Chapter 10 5 1 File select settings on page 499 Export Executes ...

Page 639: ...rt SCPI recording Starting from now all steps you perform are recorded 2 To stop SCPI recording select context sensitive menu Stop SCPI recording The SCPI Recording List dialog opens automatically 3 Proceed with How to check a SCPI list How to record SCPI lists manually 1 To retrace your settings open the context sensitive menu and select Mark all Parameters Changed from Preset This function ident...

Page 640: ...ed to a tempo rary list 3 To check the progress of the recording select Context Sensitive Show SCPI Recording List The SCPI Recording List dialog opens displaying all recorded settings so far 4 Proceed with How to check a SCPI list How to create a SCPI list with the current instrument settings in one step You can also generate a SCPI list from a manually created instrument state at any time in onl...

Page 641: ...ssing on an external PC How to check a SCPI list The easiest way to check a list is to execute it The generator returns a warning if a setting could not be performed However we recommend that you check the list and possibly rework It can be that A parameter has not assigned a SCPI command or an element of the user inter face has not an assigned parameter In these cases SYST INF SCPI SCPI command n...

Page 642: ...ecording the SCPI Recording Export dialog opens 1 Select the Format for the command syntax in which you want to save the list 2 Select Code Template Depending on the selected format proceed accordingly Note Select the code template before exporting a Plain SCPI Continue with the next step b Predefined code generator The SCPI Recording Export Select Predefined Code Template dialog opens Select one ...

Page 643: ... function in manual operation you find it in the description of the online help 1 To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual operation select the respective parameter 2 To open the corresponding help topic select one of the following In the display select context sensitive menu Help On the front panel press the Help key The help topic opens Apart from the function description it contain...

Page 644: ...urity Password 5 Select Accept 12 10 2 How to set up remote operation from a desktop system 12 10 2 1 Using a web browser The R S SMM100A supports remote operation via VNC with any web browser like Windows Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox for instance or alternatively an HTML5 web browser To operate the instrument via a web browser remotely 1 Install the JRE Java Runtime Environment on the rem...

Page 645: ...Enter the following address vnc IP address of the instrument for example vnc 10 113 1 151 A dialog opens requesting the password for the remote VNC connection 3 Enter the password and confirm with OK The default password is instrument After the connection is established the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer Sett...

Page 646: ...g VNC connection Perform one of the following a On an external Unix Linux PC close the Internet browser or the signal genera tor window b On an external Windows PC close the VNC viewer program The connection is terminated but not disabled It can be established again anytime In the Active Connections tab the displayed TCP IP connection disappears See Chapter 11 5 5 How to prevent unauthorized acces...

Page 647: ...ure 12 9 Example of a network configuration for remote operation with a smart device As shown in the figure the R S SMM100A and the WLAN router are connected to the LAN router The smart device accesses the Rohde Schwarz instrument via the WLAN router Prerequisites For this network configuration the following prerequisites must be met The required equipment is A LAN router A WLAN router hot spot Re...

Page 648: ... the smart device start the VNC App 6 In the address field enter the IP address of the instrument A log on dialog opens and requests the password for the VNC connection 7 Enter the password to establish the remote access The default user name and password is instrument See Chapter 11 5 5 How to prevent unauthorized access on page 574 After the connection is established the current screen of the si...

Page 649: ... select System Config Remote Access 5 In the Remote Access dialog select the QR Code tab 6 Scan the QR code of the instrument with your smart device 7 On the device decode the scanned QR code and pass it to the web browser A dialog opens requesting the password for the VNC connection 8 Enter the password and confirm with OK The default password is instrument After the connection is established the...

Page 650: ... SCPI Remote Trace utility see Chapter 12 6 2 2 SCPI remote trace on page 616 Firmware update To enable the full LXI functionality after a firmware update shut down and restart the instrument 12 11 2 Code generator templates This section describes the main structure of the code generator templates and shows the method with the NICVI template The code generation is controlled by templates with the ...

Page 651: ...UFFER_SIZE char readBuffer MAX_BUFFER_SIZE int length int readCount strcpy writeBuffer command append OPC to sync strcat writeBuffer OPC length strlen writeBuffer writeBuffer length n length length 1 viWrite handle writeBuffer length VI_NULL read result viRead handle readBuffer 100 readCount int main int argc char argv if InitCVIRTE 0 argv 0 0 return 1 out of memory create a VISA session and retur...

Page 652: ...sociated com mands or actions to return to manual control Table 12 8 Remote control status icons GUI symbol Transition to remote control state Transition to manual operation local state GTR controller Remote control but usable front panel keys The parameters are in read only mode GTL controller Tap the Remote icon display Local front panel or key emulation A currently performed setting is indicate...

Page 653: ...ndicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R S SMM100A follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous commands A command which does no...

Page 654: ...ram an instrument p reset is recom mended to set the R S SMM100A to a definite state The commands RST and SYSTem PRESet are equivalent for this purpose CLS also resets the status registers and clears the output buffer In all the examples we assume that A remote PC is connected to the instrument The remote PC and the instrument are switched on A connection between them is established The security s...

Page 655: ...atus enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 ESR Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg ister to zero Return values Contents Range 0 to 255 Usage Query only IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification Retu...

Page 656: ...and synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Return values Options The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed Usage Query only Manual operation S...

Page 657: ...be stored to this memory using the command SAV with the associated number It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory LOAD number file_name extension command Manual operation See Recall Immediate x on page 496 RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command ...

Page 658: ...B Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event TST Self test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code Return values ErrorCode integ...

Page 659: ...e g reference oscillator source settings Activating the preset state of the parameters related to the selected signal path SOURce hw PRESet on page 660 Activating the preset state of all parameters that are not related to the signal path DEVice PRESet on page 659 Activating the original state of delivery factory reset SYSTem FPReset on page 660 Only functions that are protected by a password remai...

Page 660: ... GUI dialogs like the key does The RST command For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function see Table 10 1 Example SYST PRES All instrument settings also the settings that are not currently active are reset to their default values Usage Setting only Manual operation See Preset on page 488 SYSTem FPReset Triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery Example SYST ...

Page 661: ...command MMEMory CDIRectory 13 5 1 File naming conventions To enable files to be used in different file systems consider the following file naming conventions The filename can be of any length and is case sensitive i e it is distinguished between uppercase and lowercase letters All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitted at the beginning of the filename Avoid using speci...

Page 662: ...e saved list files files with user data or save recall files See Example Save the user settings in a file in a specific directory on page 662 The subsequent commands for file handling select delete read out files in the directory etc require only specification of the filename File extension can be omitted after syntax evaluation of the used command the R S SMM100A filters out the relevant files De...

Page 663: ...ssume that the directory var user lists is existing and contains the files dlist1 dm_iqd and myDList dm_iqd Select a data list file as data source SOURce1 BB DM SOURce DLISt Query the data list files dm_iqd in the default directory MMEMory CDIRectory var user lists SOURce1 BB DM DLISt CATalog dlist1 myDList Specify the complete path to select a data list file dm_iqd in the specific directory MMEMo...

Page 664: ...y STORe STATe 4 settings savrcltxt Load the saved settings in the intermediate memory 4 and activate them MMEMory LOAD STATe 4 var user settings savrcltxt RCL 4 Example Working with files and directories This example shows how to list files in a directory list the subdirectories query the number of files in a directory create directory rename and delete files Query the current default directory fo...

Page 665: ...settings savrcltxt settings_new savrcltxt MMEMory CATalog var user new 25141 8102789120 DIR 4096 DIR 4096 settings_new savrcltxt BIN 16949 Delete the test directory MMEMory RDIRectory var user test Example Working with files in the volatile memory This example shows how to work with files in the var volatile directory Change the default directory for mass storage read out the files load and play a...

Page 666: ... Byte size of all files in the directory FreeDiskSpace Remaining disk space in bytes FileInfo NameFileN SuffixFileN SizeFileN List of files separated by commas NameFileN Name of the file SuffixFileN Type of the file Possible suffixes are ASCii BINary DIRectory SizeFileN Size of the file in bytes Usage Query only Manual operation See Directory File List and Filename on page 495 MMEMory CATalog LENG...

Page 667: ...irectory together with all its files Setting parameters SourceFile string String containing the path and file name of the source file DestinationFile string String containing the path and name of the target file The path can be relative or absolute If DestinationFile is not specified the SourceFile is copied to the current directory queried with the MMEMory CDIRectory command Note Existing files w...

Page 668: ... DATA UNPRotected Msus Data The setting command sends the I Q data and the marker data to the file defined with the Msus parameter The required tags are created automatically so that the file content follows the waveform file format The query reads out the I Q data part or the marker information of the specified file Waveform files can also be created with the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVefo...

Page 669: ... data in ASCII format Mx represents one marker byte where only the 4 least signifi cant bits are used These 4 bits are assigned to the 4 possible markers of the instrument 1 bit per marker Bit0 Marker 1 to Bit3 Marker 4 One 4 bit marker element is required for every I Q sample Example MMEM DATA UNPR NVWFM var user wave wv 220 I0Q0 IxQx the binary data I0Q0 IxQx is added to a file named wave wv and...

Page 670: ...ory Query parameters Path String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values DirectoryCount integer Number of parent and subdirectories Usage Query only MMEMory DELete Filename Removes a file from the specified directory Setting parameters Filename string String...

Page 671: ...meter to specify the new directory Usage Event Manual operation See Create New Directory on page 505 MMEMory MOVE SourceFile DestinationFile Moves an existing file to a new location or if no path is specified renames an existing file Setting parameters SourceFile string String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved DestinationFile string String parameters to specify the name of the ...

Page 672: ...tting in the specified file The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same num ber using the common command SAV Setting parameters savrcl_state_nr Corresponds to the specific number defined with the SAV command e g SAV 4 file_name String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 496 MEMory HFRee Return...

Page 673: ...Libration hw ALL TIME 675 CALibration ALL WARN 675 CALibration DATA FACTory DATE 675 CALibration hw CONTinueonerror 675 CALibration hw DEBug 676 CALibration hw IQModulator LOCal 676 CALibration hw FREQuency CONVerter EXTernal 676 CALibration hw LOSCillator COUPling LOCal 677 CALibration ALL MEASure Force Starts all internal adjustments that do not need external measuring equipment Note If an exter...

Page 674: ...l adjustment Return values CalInfoText string Example CAL ALL INF Instrument is calibrated no adjustment required UNCAL instrument is warming up UNCAL Please perform full adjustment after warming up UNCAL Please perform full adjustment Usage Query only Manual operation See Information on page 1023 CALibration hw ALL TEMP Queries the temperature deviation compared to the calibration temperature Suf...

Page 675: ...mple CALibration ALL WARN 1 CALibration DATA FACTory DATE Queries the date of the last factory calibration Return values Date string Example CAL DATA FACT DATE 2016 01 01 Usage Query only Manual operation See Last Factory Calibration on page 1006 CALibration hw CONTinueonerror State Continues the calibration even though an error was detected By default adjustments are aborted on error Suffix hw 1 ...

Page 676: ...The I Q modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage I Q imbalance and quadrature Return values Local 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example Start adjustment for the I Q modulator for the currently set frequency CALibration IQModulator LOCal 0 Adjustments are performed successfully Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency on page 289 CALibration hw FREQuency CONVerte...

Page 677: ... CALibration LOSCillator COUPling LOCal 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust LO Level at Current Frequency on page 308 13 7 DIAGnostic subsystem The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands the commands lis ted here are all device specific All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not af...

Page 678: ...BBB_CODER_BBB_US 1 000000V C Query the operating hours and number of power on so far DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe 112 h DIAGnostic INFO POCount 14 Commands DIAGnostic hw BGINfo CATalog 678 DIAGnostic hw BGINfo 678 DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe 679 DIAGnostic INFO POCount 679 DIAGnostic hw POINt CATalog 680 DIAGnostic hw MEASure POINt 680 DIAGnostic hw BGINfo CATalog Queries the names of the assemblies available ...

Page 679: ...sts of four parts that are separa ted by space characters Example See Example Programming example on page 678 Usage Query only Manual operation See Assembly on page 1005 DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe Queries the operating hours of the instrument so far Return values OperationTime integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example See Example Programming example on page 678 Usage Query only Manual operation See Oper...

Page 680: ...ueried with the command DIAGnostic hw POINt CATalog Return values Value value unit Example See Example Programming example on page 678 Usage Query only 13 8 HUMS remote control commands The remote control commands for the health and utilizations monitoring system HUMS comprise commands of the DIAGnostic subsystem and the commands of the SYSTem COMMunicate REST and SYSTem COMMunicate REST subsystem...

Page 681: ...Gnostic HUMS FORMat on page 682 Return values HistoryInfo block_data Device history information of the connected instrument as block data in a comma separated list blockdata event1 event2 event3 With the following parameters eventID eventTimestamp eventMessage eventDetails eventSeverity Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Dig...

Page 682: ... can query the HUMS data either in JSON format or XML format The defined format affects all other commands that return block data Parameters DataFormat JSON XML JSON Returns the HUMS data in JSON format XML Returns the HUMS data in XML format RST JSON Example Return data in JSON format DIAG HUMS FORM JSON DIAGnostic HUMS SAVE path Saves the HUMS history as a ZIP file to your preferred path Setting...

Page 683: ... command Select an SNMP version that supports communities SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion on page 684 Setting parameters CommunityString String containing the community name Example Set community name SYST COMM SNMP VERS V12 SYST COMM SNMP COMM RO ABC Usage Setting only Manual operation See Access on page 610 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW CommunityString Defines the SNMP community string fo...

Page 684: ... subsystem The DISPlay system contains the commands to set the power save mode of the instrument Programming Examples Example Activating screen saver mode and display update Use the following commands to switch on the screen saver of your instrument or to automatic display These settings are particularly useful when you control the instru ment remotely Set the wait time interval and activate the s...

Page 685: ...sc DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 685 DISPlay PSAVe STATe 685 DISPlay UPDate STATe 686 DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude 686 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 686 DISPlay ANNotation ALL 686 DISPlay DIALog ID 687 DISPlay DIALog OPEN 687 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe 688 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL 688 DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff HoldoffTimeMin Sets the wait time for the screen saver mode of the display Paramet...

Page 686: ...Notation AMPLitude State Indicates asterisks instead of the level values in the status bar Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST n a factory preset 1 Example See Example Activating screen saver mode and display update on page 684 Manual operation See Annotation Amplitude on page 567 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency State Indicates asterisks instead of the frequency values in the status bar Parameters State ...

Page 687: ...mation mandatory input parameter for the com mands DISPlay DIALog OPEN on page 687 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe on page 688 Optional parts String of X values where X is a character interpreted as follows q DialogQualifier optional dialog qualifier usually the letter A or B as displayed in the dialog title i Instances comma separated list of instance indexes given in the order h c s d g u 0 Default is zero...

Page 688: ...query DISPlay DIALog ID The DialogName part of the query result is sufficient Example See Example Querying the dialog IDs opening and closing dia logs on page 685 Usage Setting only DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL Closes all open dialogs Example See Example Querying the dialog IDs opening and closing dia logs on page 685 Usage Event 13 10 FORMat subsystem The commands in the FORMat subsystem determine th...

Page 689: ...s the numeric format for responses of the status register Parameters Format ASCii BINary HEXadecimal OCTal ASCii Returns the register content as a decimal number BINary HEXadecimal OCTal Returns the register content either as a binary hexadecimal or octal number According to the selected format the number starts with B binary H hexadecimal or O octal RST ASCii Example FORM SREG HEX returns the reg...

Page 690: ...ecute a hard copy to an automatic named file HCOPy DEVice LANGuage PNG HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe 1 defines the output format sets the instrument to automatically create output file names Configure hard copy options set automatic naming rules An automatically generated file name consists of Prefix YYYY MM DD Number Format HCOPy DEVice LANGuage BMP defines output format bmp HCOPy REGion DIALog sele...

Page 691: ...following commands you can configure the settings of a hard copy HCOPy DATA 691 HCOPy IMAGe FORMat 691 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 691 HCOPy REGion 692 HCOPy FILE NAME 692 HCOPy EXECute 692 HCOPy DATA Transfers the hard copy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote client Return values Data block data Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Usage Query only HCOPy IMAGe FORM...

Page 692: ... Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Manual operation See File on page 517 HCOPy EXECute Generates a hard copy of the current display The output destination is a file Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 517 13 11 2 Automatic naming Use the following commands to automatically assign a file name H...

Page 693: ...irectory string RST var user Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Manual operation See Path on page 518 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar Deletes all files with extensions bmp jpg png and xpm in the directory set for automatic naming Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Path on page 518 HCOPy FILE NAM...

Page 694: ...ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 690 Manual operation See Prefix Year Month Day on page 518 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE NUMBer Queries the number that is used as part of the file name for the next hard copy in auto matic mode At the beginning the count starts at 0 The R S SMM100A searches the specified out put directory for the highest number in the stored ...

Page 695: ...out 695 KBOard LAYout Layout Selects the language for an external keyboard and assigns the keys acccordingly Parameters Layout CHINese DANish DUTCh DUTBe ENGLish ENGUK FINNish FRENch FREBe FRECa GERMan ITALian JAPanese KORean NORWegian PORTuguese RUSSian SPANish SWEDish ENGUS RST n a factory preset ENGLish Example KBOard LAYout US activates American keyboard Manual operation See USB Keyboard Layou...

Page 696: ...Activates the RF output signal of the instrument Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST n a factory preset 0 Example OUTPut ALL STATe 0 OUTPut hw STATe State Activates the RF output signal Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example OUTPut1 ON Activates the RF output Manual operation See RF State RF ON on page 296 OUTPut hw STATe PON Pon Defines the state of the RF output signal when the instrument is swit...

Page 697: ...ulting variation range is calculated according to the posi tion RST AUTO Example SOURce1 POWer ALC STATe 1 OUTPut1 AMODe FIXed Manual operation See Mode on page 388 OUTPut hw BLANk LIST STATe State Activates RF output blanking Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example OUTPut1 BLAN LIST STAT ON Activates the RF output blanking OUTPut hw IMPedance Queries the impedance of the RF outputs Return value...

Page 698: ... See Level Range on page 389 OUTPut hw PROTection CLEar Resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped To define the output state use the command OUTPut hw STATe Example OUTPut1 PROT CLE Resets the protective circuit of the RF output Usage Event Manual operation See Overload on page 390 OUTPut hw PROTection TRIPped Queries the state of the protective circuit Return values Tripped 1 ON 0 O...

Page 699: ...e local state enhances the measurement performance Measurements results can be retrieved in local state on or off Sensor parameters are set with the SENSe commands To start the measurement and retrieve the result use the READ ch POWer command Suffix Value range Description SENSe ch 1 to 4 Indicates the sensor Use the SLISt commands to change the sensor mapping READ ch 1 to 4 Sensor assignment INIa...

Page 700: ...ds a sensor to the list that is connected to the USB interface SLISt LIST Response NRP33SN V 900007 USB Legacy NRP Z211 900001 USB Legacy NRP33SN V 900005 USBTMC NRP33SN V 900011 LAN Lists all automatically detected sensors SLISt ELEMent3 MAPPing SENS1 Maps the third sensor from the list to the first sensor channel SLISt SENSor MAP NRPS18S 100654 USB Legacy SENS3 Maps the sensor to channel 3 SLISt...

Page 701: ... to 10 us SENSe1 UNIT DBM Selects unit dBm for the measured value INITiate CONTinuous ON Switches the continous power measurement on READ Triggers the measurement and displays the results SLISt LIST 702 SLISt SCAN STATe 702 SLISt SCAN LSENsor 702 SLISt SCAN USENsor 703 SLISt CLEar LAN 703 SLISt CLEar USB 703 SLISt CLEar ALL 704 SLISt ELEMent ch MAPPing 704 SLISt SENSor MAP 704 INITiate hw POWer CO...

Page 702: ...separated string Return values SensorList String of comma separated entries Each entry contains information on the sensor type serial num ber and interface The order of the entries does not correspond to the order the sensors are displayed in the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog Example See Example Detecting and assigning a power sensor on page 700 Usage Query only Manual operation See Sensor Mapping Lis...

Page 703: ...Integer Range 0 to 999999 RST 0 Example See Example Detecting and assigning a power sensor on page 700 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add USB Sensor settings on page 409 SLISt CLEar LAN Removes all R S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN from the list Example See Example Detecting and assigning a power sensor on page 700 Usage Event Manual operation See Clear on page 409 SLISt CLEar US...

Page 704: ...SLISt SENSor MAP SensorId Mapping Assigns a sensor directly to one of the sensor channels using the sensor name and serial number To find out the the sensor name and ID you can get it from the label of the R S NRP or using the command SLISt SCAN STATe This command detects all R S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN or via USBTMC protocol Setting parameters SensorId string Mapping enum Example S...

Page 705: ...on MAV bit Suffix ch 1 to 3 Return values Power float or float float The sensor returns the result in the unit set with command SENSe ch UNIT POWer Certain power sensors such as the R S NRP Z81 return two values first the value of the average level and separated by a comma the peak value Example SENS1 UNIT DBM Selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result READ1 Queries the measurement re...

Page 706: ...ample Performing a power measurement with a fixed fil ter on page 701 Manual operation See Default Aperture Time on page 416 SENSe ch POWer APERture TIMe ApTime Defines the aperture time size of the acquisition interval for the corresponding sensor Parameters ApTime float Range depends on connected power sensor Increment 1E 9 RST depends on connected power sensor Example See Example Performing a p...

Page 707: ...ries the list of the S parameter data sets that have been loaded to the power sen sor Return values List string list RST 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See S Parameter on page 416 SENSe ch POWer DISPlay PERManent PRIority Priority Selects average or peak power for permanent display Parameters Priority AVERage PEAK RST AVERage Example SENS1 DISP PERM STAT ON Turns on the permanent view SENS1 D...

Page 708: ...elects the filter length for SENS POW FILT TYPE USER As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window a constant filter length results in a constant measure ment time see also About the measuring principle averaging filter filter length and achieving stable results on page 410 The R S NRP power sensors provide different resolutions for setting the filter length depending on the used ...

Page 709: ...settling time of the auto averaging filter in the NSRatio mode and thus limits the length of the filter The filter type is set with command SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE Parameters MTime float Range 1 to 999 99 Increment 0 01 RST 4 Example See Example Performing a power measurement with a fixed fil ter on page 701 Manual operation See Timeout on page 416 SENSe ch POWer FILTer SONCe Starts searching t...

Page 710: ...ding to the crite rion that the intrinsic noise of the sensor 2 standard deviations does not exceed the specified noise content You can define the noise content with command SENSe ch POWer FILTer NSRatio Note To avoid long settling times when the power is low you can limit the averaging factor limited with the timeout parame ter SENSe ch POWer FILTer NSRatio MTIMe RST AUTO Example See Example Perf...

Page 711: ...e g to consider an attenuator in the signal path Parameters Offset float Range 100 0 to 100 0 RST 0 Default unit dB Example SENS1 POW OFFS 10 0 Sets a level offset of 10 dB Manual operation See Level Offset State Level Offset on page 415 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet STATe State Activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value The level offset value is set with command SENSe ch POWer OFFSe...

Page 712: ...nce level Parameters Source A USER RF RST A Example See Example Performing a power measurement with a fixed fil ter on page 701 Manual operation See Use Frequency Of on page 414 SENSe ch POWer STATus DEVice Queries if a sensor is connected to the instrument Return values Status 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SENS1 STAT Response 1 A sensor is connected Usage Query only Manual operation See State on page ...

Page 713: ... sensor before zeroing We recommend that you zero in regular intervals at least once a day if The temperature has varied more than about 5 C The sensor has been replaced You want to measure very low power Example SENS1 ZERO Executes zeroing Usage Event Manual operation See Zero on page 414 13 15 SCONfiguration subsystem The SCONfiguration subsystem contains the commands for defining the system con...

Page 714: ...nal BBMM1 DIRection Response OUT SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 DIRection Query the IQ connection state SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer1 IQConnection STATe Response 1 SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 IQConnection STATe Response 1 Manage external instruments SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote LIST Response SMBV100B SGS_2 SGT100A SMBVB_1 SMBVB_2 SMW200A 100010 Add instruments to selection SCONfiguration E...

Page 715: ...ion EXTernal BBMM1 INAMe Response SGT100A A SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 INAMe Response SGS_1 A Specify characteristics of the IQ output signal SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 RF COUPling ON SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 RF FREQuency OFFSet 0 SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 RF POWer OFFSet 10 OUTPut1 STATe ON SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 RF STATe Response 1 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RF C...

Page 716: ... 10MHZ SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument MODe SECondary SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument STATe 1 SOURce1 INPut USER5 DIRection INP SOURce1 INPut USER5 SIGNal OUTSinc SOURce1 INPut USER6 DIRection OUTP OUTPut1 USER6 SIGNal INSinc SCONfiguration MULTiinstrument TRIGger SYNChronization SYNC Multi instrument configuration 716 I Q stream mapping 717 External RF and I Q instruments 718 13 15 1 Multi instrume...

Page 717: ...ge 716 Usage Query only Manual operation See Synchronisation State on page 443 13 15 2 I Q stream mapping The following commands configure the I Q stream mapper SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing FADer ch STReam st STATe 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing RF ch STReam st STATe 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing BBMM ch STReam st STATe 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing IQOutput ch STReam st STATe 717 SCON...

Page 718: ... STReam st POFFset SmPhasOffset Sets the phase offset of the corresponding stream Parameters SmPhasOffset float Range 999 99 to 999 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Distributing the I Q streams to the output connec tors on page 713 13 15 3 External RF and I Q instruments The following commands configure external RF and I Q instruments Commands SCONfiguration EXTernal DISPlay 720 SCONfig...

Page 719: ...n EXTernal FADer ch RF POWer OFFSet 724 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF POWer OFFSet 724 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch RF POWer OFFSet 724 SCONfiguration EXTernal FADer ch RF STATe 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF STATe 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch RF STATe 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN STATe 725 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote...

Page 720: ...Ternal RF ch REMote SEND 730 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote SEND 730 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch CONNections CHECk 730 SCONfiguration EXTernal DISPlay DisplayMode Filters the displayed connectors upon the selected criteria Parameters DisplayMode ALL MAPPed INPut OUTPut RST MAPPed Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instruments on page 714 Manual operation Se...

Page 721: ...figuration EXTernal PBEHaviour 1 RST SOURce FREQuency CW 60000000000 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RCONnection STATe 1 SOURce1 IQ OUTPup ANALog TYPE DIFF SCONfiguration EXTernal PBEHaviour 0 RST SOURce FREQuency CW 1000000000 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RCONnection STATe 0 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE SING Manual operation See Preset behavior Keep connections to external instru ments on...

Page 722: ... ON 0 OFF Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instruments on page 714 Usage Query only Manual operation See Remote Connection Status on page 461 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch INAMe SCONfiguration EXTernal FADer ch INAMe SCONfiguration EXTernal RF INAMe SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch INAMe Queries the name of the connected external instrument Return values InstrName stri...

Page 723: ...equency SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF FREQuency Frequency SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch RF FREQuency Frequency In uncoupled mode sets the RF frequency of the external instrument Parameters Frequency float Range 100E3 to 3E9 Increment 0 01 RST 1E9 Example SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RF COUPling OFF SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RF FREQuency 2143E6 RF frequency of the external ins...

Page 724: ...Vel IMMediate AMPLitude 30 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RF COUPling OFF SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 RF POWer 20 RF level of the external instrument is 20 dB Manual operation See Delta RF Frequency RF Level on page 462 SCONfiguration EXTernal FADer ch RF POWer OFFSet PowerOffset SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch RF POWer OFFSet PowerOffset SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch RF POWer OFFSet ...

Page 725: ...xample See Example Connecting and configuring external instruments on page 714 Manual operation See RF State on page 462 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN Scans the network for connected instruments Example See Example Connecting and configuring external instruments on page 714 Usage Event Manual operation See Detect Scan on page 464 SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote SCAN STATe Queries if scanning ...

Page 726: ...t of available instruments Parameters HwChan String Hardware channel USB or LAN used by the remote channel to the external instrument Range LAN to USB RST LAN TcpIporUsbAddr String IP address or hostname of the connected external instrument RfPathNumber String Determines the number of RF paths the external instrument is equipped with Range 1 to 2 RST 1 Setting parameters InstrName String Alias nam...

Page 727: ...rument for the selected connector Parameters InstrName String Instrument alias name as retrieved with the command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote LIST or defined with the command SCONfiguration EXTernal REMote ADD RfPath String Determines the used RF output of the external instrument For a one path instrument the output path is fixed Manual operation See External Instrument on page 464 See Apply on...

Page 728: ... on page 714 Usage Setting only SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch REMote INFO SCONfiguration EXTernal FADer ch REMote INFO SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INFO SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INFO Queries information on the external instrument Example SCONfiguration EXTernal BBMM1 REMote INFO SGT 101676 LAN rssgt100a101676 A Rohde Schwarz SGT100A 1419 4501k02 101676 3 1 19 4 3 18 25...

Page 729: ...uring external instruments on page 714 Usage Query only Manual operation See Initialization Sequence on page 466 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch REMote INITialization FILE Filename SCONfiguration EXTernal FADer ch REMote INITialization FILE Filename SCONfiguration EXTernal RF ch REMote INITialization FILE Filename SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INITialization FILE Filename Queries the...

Page 730: ...r 13 15 SCONfiguration subsystem on page 713 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Command Send Command on page 468 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch CONNections CHECk Queries the status of the required connections between the R S SMM100A and the R S SZU R S SZU is connected to the R S SMM100A via USB Example SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput1 REMote ISELect SZU 999991 B1066 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut A...

Page 731: ...URce PGEN subsystem 931 SOURce PHASe subsystem 933 SOURce POWer subsystem 934 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem 944 SOURce SWEep subsystem 949 13 16 1 Connector settings This section summarizes the commands of the OUTPut and INPut subsystems nec essary to configure the connectors settings Listed are the commands for configuring the output signals and the inputs for trigger data and control signals The ...

Page 732: ... DIRection OUTP OUTPut1 USER6 SIGNal MTR OUTPut1 USER6 TRIGger IMMediate SOURce1 INPut USER5 DIRection OUTP OUTPut1 USER5 SIGNal MTR OUTPut1 USER5 TRIGger IMMediate SOURce hw INPut TM ch DIRection 733 OUTPut hw TM ch DIRection 733 SOURce INPut USER ch DIRection 733 OUTPut USER ch DIRection 733 SOURce hw INPut TM ch SIGNal 733 OUTPut hw TM ch SIGNal 734 SOURce INPut USER ch SIGNal 735 OUTPut USER c...

Page 733: ...irection INPut OUTPut RST OUTPut Manual operation See T M C Connector Direction on page 540 SOURce INPut USER ch DIRection Direction OUTPut USER ch DIRection Direction Determines whether the connector is used as an input or an output Suffix USER ch 1 to 6 Parameters Direction INPut OUTPut UNUSed UNUSed the connector is not defined Example See Example Global connectors settings configuration on pag...

Page 734: ...Baseband 1 3 OUTPut2 Baseband B D or Baseband 2 4 TM ch 1 2 3 Determines the local connector where OUTPut1 TM1 2 3 TMC1 2 3 of Baseband A C or 1 3 and OUTPut2 TM1 2 3 TMC4 5 6 of Baseband B D or 2 4 Parameters Signal MARKA1 MARKA2 MARKA3 SCLA LATTA BGATA HOPA CWMODA TRIGA MARKB1 MARKB2 MARKB3 SCLB LATTB BGATB HOPB CWMODB TRIGB MARKC1 MARKC2 MARKC3 SCLC LATTC BGATC HOPC CWMODC TRIGC MARKD1 MARKD2 M...

Page 735: ...IN BERRESTIN TRIG1 TRIG2 Global Trigger 1 2 CLOCK1 CLOCK2 Global Clock 1 2 NSEGM1 NSEGM2 Global Next Segment 1 2 IPULSA IPULSB Pulse In A B available for USER4 5 6 FEEDback Baseband Feedback available for USER6 BERDATIN BERCLKIN BERDATENIN BERRESTIN BER Data Clock Data Enable and Restart ERRTA ERRTB External restart trigger signals for REG Example See Example Global connectors settings configurati...

Page 736: ...lable for USER6 RTRIGA RTRIGB REG trigger A B available for USER4 5 BERRESTOUT BERDATENOUT BERCLKOUT BERDATOUT BERT TestGen Data Clock Data Enable and Restart LOW HIGH Always 0 1 NONE none RST MARKA1 Example See Example Global connectors settings configuration on page 732 Options BERRESTOUT BERDATENOUT BERCLKOUT BERDATOUT require R S SMM K80 RTRIGA RTRIGB require R S SMM K78 Manual operation See S...

Page 737: ...t 0 1 RST 1 Default unit V Example See Example Global connectors settings configuration on page 732 Manual operation See Threshold User4 6 Input Threshold Pulse Input on page 364 SOURce INPut USER CLOCk IMPedance Impedance SOURce INPut USER TRIGger IMPedance Impedance Selects the input impedance for the external trigger inputs Parameters Impedance G1K G50 RST G1K Example See Example Global connect...

Page 738: ...LOCk LEVel Level SOURce hw INPut TM TRIGger LEVel Level Sets the high low threshold in volts for the trigger and clock signal inputs of the base band section Suffix SOURce hw 1 2 Determines the baseband the connectors belong to where SOURce1 Baseband A C and SOURce2 Baseband B D Parameters Level float Range 0 3 to 2 Increment 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Threshold Clock Trigger Input on page 540...

Page 739: ...e baseband the connectors belong to where SOURce1 Baseband A C and SOURce2 Baseband B D Parameters Slope NEGative POSitive RST POSitive Manual operation See Clock Input Slope on page 541 SOURce hw INPut TM TRIGger SLOPe Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal Suffix SOURce hw 1 2 Determines the baseband the connectors belong to where SOURce1 Baseband A C...

Page 740: ...e ON SOURce1 BBIN MPERiod 10s SOURce1 BBIN ALEVel EXECute SOURce1 BBIN CFACtor SOURce1 BBIN POWer PEAK SOURce1 BBIN POWer RMS monitor the signal SOURce1 BBIN OLOad STATe 0 i e no overflow detected SOURce1 BBIN OLOad HOLD RESet SOURce1 BBIN OLOad HOLD STATe Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q An external digital signal must be applied at the HS Dig I Q connectors SOURce1...

Page 741: ...Te 744 SOURce hw BBIN MODE 744 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SOURce 744 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SUM 745 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe MAX 745 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital ASETting STATe 745 SOURce hw BBIN MPERiod 746 SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute 746 SOURce hw BBIN POWer CFACtor 746 SOURce hw BBIN POWer PEAK 746 SOURce hw BBIN POWer RMS 747 SOURce hw BBIN STATe State Enables feeding of an external digital signal into the si...

Page 742: ...ignal is fed Parameters BBinDigInterfac DIGital HSDin DIGital HSDin DIN Dig I Q HSDin HS Dig I Q RST HSDin Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 740 Manual operation See Interface on page 472 SOURce hw BBIN CDEVice Indicates the ID of an externally connected Rohde Schwarz Instrument or Rohde Schwarz device Return values CDevice string None no device is...

Page 743: ...peration See Name on page 474 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 POWer CFACtor BbinIqHsChCrFac Sets the crest factor of the individual channels Parameters BbinIqHsChCrFac float Range 0 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 740 Manual operation See Crest Factor on page 474 SOURce hw BBIN CHANnel ch0 POWer PEAK BbinHsChPoPeak Sets the ...

Page 744: ...hSaRat float Range 400 to 250E6 System Config Mode Advanced 1250E6 System Config Mode Standard Increment 0 001 RST 100E6 Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 740 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 474 SOURce hw BBIN MODE Mode Defines that a digital external signal is applied Parameters Mode DIGital RST DIGital Example See Example Applying an ext...

Page 745: ...gital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 740 Usage Query only Options R S SMM B9 Manual operation See Aggregated Link Sample Rate on page 475 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe MAX Queries the maximum sample rate Return values DigIqHsOutSRMax integer Range 1050E6 to 1250E6 RST 1050E6 Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal HS Dig I Q on page 740 Usage Query only Manual operation See Agg...

Page 746: ...ce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute Starts measuring the input signal The measurement estimates the crest factor peak and RMS level Example See Example Applying an external digital baseband signal Dig I Q on page 740 Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Level Set on page 475 SOURce hw BBIN POWer CFACtor CFactor Sets the crest factor of the external baseband signal Parameters CFactor float Range 0 to 30 Inc...

Page 747: ...scribe all commands for analog modulation of the RF signal Divided in separate sections you can configure amplitude modulation AM fre quency modulation FM phase modulation PhiM and pulse modulation PULM You can perform each of the modulations either with an internally generated modula tion signal or with an externally applied signal To configure the internal signal use the commands listed in Chapt...

Page 748: ...system contains the commands for setting the amplitude modulation and also the broadband amplitude modulation Activation of amplitude modulation deactivates ARB I Q modulation digital modulation and all digital standards The following examples show some variants for generating AM signals Example Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal Using the internal LF generator the following command sequenc...

Page 749: ...ith fixed total deviation depth SOURce1 AM1 DEViation MODe TOT SOURce1 AM1 DEPTh SUM 60 Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the second path SOURce1 AM2 DEPTh Response 28 Combine the signals of both paths with fixed ratio SOURce1 AM1 DEViation MODe RAT SOURce1 AM1 RATio 100 SOURce1 AM2 DEPTh 25 Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the first path SOURce1 AM1 DEPTh Response...

Page 750: ...AM1 STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 The following commands are available SOURce hw AM ch STATe 750 SOURce hw AM ch SOURce 750 SOURce hw AM ch DEPTh 751 SOURce hw AM DEPTh SUM 751 SOURce hw AM DEViation MODE 751 SOURce hw AM RATio 752 SOURce hw AM ch SENSitivity 752 SOURce hw AM ch STATe State Activates amplitude modulation Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Creating an amplitude modulat...

Page 751: ...channel Parameters Depth float Range 0 to 100 Example See Example Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal on page 748 Manual operation See Depth on page 368 SOURce hw AM DEPTh SUM AmDepthSum Sets the total depth of the LF signal when using combined signal sources in amplitude modulation Parameters AmDepthSum float Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 30 Example See Example Using combined LF signals ...

Page 752: ...T 100 Example See Example Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal on page 748 Manual operation See Ratio Path2 Path1 on page 369 SOURce hw AM ch SENSitivity Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity of the external signal source for amplitude modulation in V Parameters Sensitivity float Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 30 Example See Example Using an external signal source on page 749 Manual operation Se...

Page 753: ...ators of both paths the following command sequences con figure a frequency modulated signal with determined deviations Configure the FM modulation settings with combined LF signal sources SOURce1 FM1 SOURce LF1 SOURce1 FM1 DEViation 1000 Select the modulation signal source for the second path SOURce1 FM2 SOURce LF2 Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth SOURce1 FM1 DEVi...

Page 754: ...RCe1 FM1 SENSitivity Response 1000 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000 Hz V Switch on FM and RF signal output SOURce1 FM1 STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 The following commands are available SOURce hw FM ch STATe 754 SOURce hw FM ch DEViation 755 SOURce hw FM ch SOURce 755 SOURce hw FM DEViation MODE 756 SOURce hw FM DEViation SUM 756 SOURce hw FM ...

Page 755: ...ncy modulated RF signal on page 752 Manual operation See Deviation on page 365 SOURce hw FM ch SOURce Source Selects the modulation source for frequency modulation Suffix FM ch 1 2 Modulation signal channel Parameters Source INTernal EXTernal LF1 LF2 NOISe EXT1 EXT2 LF1 LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal INTernal LF2 Works like LF1 EXTernal Works like EXT1 EXT1 EXT2 Uses an externally supp...

Page 756: ...e Using combined LF signals on page 753 Manual operation See Deviation Mode on page 365 SOURce hw FM DEViation SUM FmDevSum Sets the total deviation of the LF signal when using combined signal sources in fre quency modulation Parameters FmDevSum float Range 0 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 RST 1E3 Example See Example Using combined LF signals on page 753 Manual operation See Total Deviation on page 366 SO...

Page 757: ...d signal for frequency modulation The sensitivity depends on the set modulation deviation Return values Sensitivity float Sensitivity in Hz V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input Range 0 to max Increment 0 01 Example See Example Using an external signal source on page 754 Usage Query only 13 16 3 4 SOURce PM subsystem Option R S SMM K720 The PM subsystem contains th...

Page 758: ...NSitivity Response 1 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 1RAD V Activate the signal output SOURce1 PM1 STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 Example Using combined LF signals Using the internal LF generators of both paths the following command sequences con figure an phase modulated signal with determined deviations Configure the Phase modulation settings wit...

Page 759: ...ENSitivity 761 SOURce PM ch DEViation 761 SOURce hw PM ch STATe State Activates phase modulation Activation of phase modulation deactivates frequency modulation Suffix PM ch 1 2 Sets the modulation signal channel Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Performing phase modulation on page 757 Manual operation See State on page 365 SOURce hw PM ch SOURce Source Selects the modulation s...

Page 760: ...viation LNOise Selects a phase modulation mode with phase noise and spuri ous characteristics close to CW mode RST HBANdwidth Example See Example Performing phase modulation on page 757 Manual operation See Mode on page 367 SOURce hw PM DEViation MODE PmDevMode Selects the coupling mode The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total deviation Parameters PmDevMode UNCoupl...

Page 761: ...ath1 in percent Parameters Ratio float Range 0 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 100 Example See Example Performing phase modulation on page 757 Manual operation See Ratio Path2 Path1 on page 367 SOURce hw PM SENSitivity Queries the sensitivity of the externally applied signal for phase modulation The returned value reports the sensitivity in RAD V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation o...

Page 762: ...on select the trigger mode and determine delay times for the pulse modula tion signal Example Perform pulse modulation The example shows a command sequence to perform pulse modulation Reset the instrument to start from an initial state RST CLS Set the RF signal frequency and level SOURce FREQuency CW 4000000000 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 25 Configure the pulse modulation settings Selec...

Page 763: ...following commands are available SOURce hw PULM MODE 763 SOURce hw PULM TRIGger MODE 764 SOURce hw PULM PERiod 764 SOURce hw PULM WIDTh 764 SOURce hw PULM DELay 764 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle DELay 765 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle WIDTh 765 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle STATe 765 SOURce hw PULM STATe 765 SOURce hw PULM SOURce 766 SOURce hw PULM TTYPe 766 SOURce hw PULM OUTPut VIDeo POLarity 766 SOURce hw PULM POLarit...

Page 764: ...generated modulation signal Parameters Period float The minimum value depends on the installed options R S SMM K22 or R S SMM K23 Range 20E 9 to 100 Increment 5E 9 RST 10E 6 Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 762 Manual operation See Pulse Period on page 372 SOURce hw PULM WIDTh Width Sets the width of the generated pulse that means the pulse length It must be at least 20ns less ...

Page 765: ...age 373 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle WIDTh Width Sets the width of the second pulse Parameters Width float Increment 5E 9 Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 762 Manual operation See Double Pulse Width on page 372 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle STATe State Provided for backward compatibility with former Rohde Schwarz signal generators Works like the command SOURce hw PULM MODEDOUBle Parameters St...

Page 766: ...esulting in longer rise fall times FAST enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times RST FAST Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 762 Manual operation See Transition Type on page 363 SOURce hw PULM OUTPut VIDeo POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse video modulating signal related to the RF modulated signal Parameters Polarity NORMal INVerted NORMal the vid...

Page 767: ...See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 762 Manual operation See Impedance Pulse Input on page 364 SOURce hw PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance Impedance Sets the impedance for the external pulse trigger Parameters Impedance G50 G10K RST G50 Example See Example Perform pulse modulation on page 762 13 16 4 SOURce BB subsystem This subsystem contains all commands for digital signal generation It i...

Page 768: ...er RMS 770 SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset FOffset SOURce hw BB FOFFset FOffset Sets a frequency offset for the internal external baseband signal The offset affects the generated baseband signal Parameters FOffset float Range depends on the installed options Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit Hz Example SOURce1 BB FOFFset 2MHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 260 SOURce hw BBIN POFFset POffset ...

Page 769: ...le SOURce1 BBIN ROUTe A SOURce hw BB POWer PEAK Queries the peak level of the baseband signal relative to full scale of 0 5 V in terms of dB full scale Return values Peak float Range 145 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dBfs Example BB POW PEAK Queries the peak level of the baseband signal Usage Query only SOURce hw BB CFACtor Queries the crest factor of the baseband signal Return values CF...

Page 770: ...n remote control and all other sections describe the configuration of the digital modulation Required options See Chapter 4 5 1 Required options on page 115 The commands are grouped in the following sections Programming examples 770 General commands 773 Save recall settings 775 Filter settings 776 Modulation and coding settings 778 Power ramping 781 Trigger settings 783 Marker settings 787 Clock s...

Page 771: ...e BB DM PRBS LENGth 9 SOURce BB DM SOURce DLISt Set the default directory and query the existing data lists MMEM CDIR var user DLists SOURce BB DM DLISt CATalog DList1 DList2 delete a list and create a new data list SOURce BB DM DLISt DELete DList1 SOURce BB DM DLISt SELect DList2 copy the content of an existing data list to the new data list SOURce BB DM DLISt COPY DList3 query the content of the...

Page 772: ...e signal generation SOURce BB DM TRIGger SEQuence SINGle SOURce BB DM TRIGger SLENgth 200 the first 200 samples will be output after the next trigger event SOURce BB DM TRIGger SEQuence ARETrigger SOURce BB DM TRIGger SOURce EGT1 external trigger signal must be provided at the connector configured for the external global trigger 1 signal SOURce BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut ON SOURce B...

Page 773: ...ault settings for digital modulation RST values specified for the com mands Not affected is the state set with the command SOURce hw BB DM STATe Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 770 Usage Event Manual operation See Set To Default on page 117 SOURce hw BB DM SRATe SRate Sets the symbol rate in Hz kHz MHz or sym s ksym s and Msym s Parameters SRate float Range 50 to depends on th...

Page 774: ...n page 770 Manual operation See Set according to Standard on page 117 SOURce hw BB DM SOURce Source Selects the data source Parameters Source ZERO ONE PRBS PATTern DLISt RST PRBS Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 770 Manual operation See Data Source on page 119 SOURce hw BB DM PATTern Pattern BitCount Selects the data pattern for the internal data source Parameters Pattern numer...

Page 775: ...mation on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory Return values Catalog filename1 filename2 Returns a string of file names separated by commas Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 770 Usage Query only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 117 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt STORe Filename SOURce hw BB DM SETTing STORe Filename Stores the current settings into the s...

Page 776: ...Filename Deletes the selected file from the default or specified directory Deleted are files with the file extension dm respectively dm_stu Refer to Chapter 13 5 2 Accessing files in the default or in a specified directory on page 662 for general information on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory Setting parameters Filename string Example See Example Performing general tasks on ...

Page 777: ...er PARameter SPHase SPhase Sets the filter parameter Filter Type Parameter Parameter Name Min Max Increment Default APCO25 Roll off factor Apco25 0 05 0 99 0 01 0 2 APCO25Lsm Cut off frequency for the lowpass gauss filter LOWPass GAUSs Cosine 400 25E6 1E 3 270833 333 COSine Bandwidth FiltParm 400 depends on the installed options 1E 3 270833 333 COSine Roll off factor Cosine 0 05 1 0 01 0 35 GAUSs ...

Page 778: ...settings SOURce hw BB DM CODing Coding Selects the modulation coding Parameters Coding OFF DIFF DPHS DGRay GRAY GSM NADC PDC PHS TETRa APCO25 PWT TFTS INMarsat VDL EDGE APCO25FSK ICO CDMA2000 WCDMA APCO258PSK OFF The coding is automatically disabled if the selected modulation type is not possible with the coding that has been set DPHS Phase Difference DGRay Difference Gray RST GSM Example See Exam...

Page 779: ...w BB DM AQPSk ANGLe Angle For AQPSK modulation sets the angle alpha between the point 0 0 and the I axis Parameters Angle float Range 0 to 180 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit Deg Example BB DM FORM AQPS BB DM AQPS ANGL 45 Manual operation See Angle Alpha on page 122 SOURce hw BB DM ASK DEPTh Depth Sets the ASK modulation depth for modulation type ASK Parameters Depth float Range 0 to 100 Increme...

Page 780: ... symbol rate see data sheet Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 5 Default unit Hz Example SOURce BB DM FORMat FSKVar SOURce BB DM FSK VARiable TYPE FSK4 SOURce BB DM FSK VARiable SYMBol0 DEViation 135000 Manual operation See Deviation xxxx on page 123 SOURce hw BB DM FSK VARiable TYPE Type The command selects the modulation type for Variable FSK Parameters Type FSK4 FSK8 FSK16 RST FSK4 Example See SOUR...

Page 781: ...e Gamma Gamma 1 on page 123 SOURce hw BB DM SWITching STATe State Enables switching between a modulated and an unmodulated signal Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Manual operation See State Modulation CW Switching on page 123 Power ramping SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp SOURce Source Sets the source for the power ramp control signals Parameters Source INTernal RST INTernal Example See Example Enable power...

Page 782: ...y FDelay SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp RDELay RDelay Sets the delay in the rising edge Parameters RDelay float Range 0 to 4 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit symbol Example See Example Enable power ramping on page 772 Manual operation See Rise Delay on page 127 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp ATTenuation Attenuation Sets the level attenuation for signal ranges that are flagged with level attribute attenu ated by th...

Page 783: ...s State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Enable power ramping on page 772 Manual operation See State on page 126 Trigger settings SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger SEQuence Sequence Selects the trigger mode For detailed description of the trigger modes refer to Impact of the trigger modes on the signal generation on page 96 Parameters Sequence AUTO RETRigger AAUTo ARETrigger SINGle RST AUTO Example See ...

Page 784: ...nual operation See Source on page 110 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger SLENgth SLength Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the SINGle trigger mode Parameters SLength integer Range 1 to 4294967295 RST 1000 Default unit symbol Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 772 Manual operation See Signal Duration on page 110 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger RMODe Queries...

Page 785: ...m on page 110 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXECute Executes a trigger Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 772 Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Trigger on page 110 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger DELay UNIT TrigDelUnit Determines the units the trigger delay is expressed in Parameters TrigDelUnit SAMPle TIME RST SAMPle Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit v...

Page 786: ...alues depend on the installed options See Specifying delay and inhibit values on page 101 Parameters ExtTimeDelay float Range 0 to 7929 170398682 Increment 0 25E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Example See Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units on page 798 Manual operation See Specified External Delay Specified Trigger Delay on page 112 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal RDELay Queries the...

Page 787: ...MODE Mode Defines the signal for the selected marker output For detailed description of the regular marker modes refer to Marker modes on page 93 Parameters Mode CLISt PULSe PATTern RATio CLISt A marker signal that is defined in the selected control list is gen erated RST RATio Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 772 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 113 ...

Page 788: ...e divider for pulse marker mode PULSe Parameters Divider integer Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 772 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 113 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency Queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal PULSe Return values Frequency float Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and tri...

Page 789: ...ters Source INTernal RST INTernal Example See Example Adjusting clock marker and trigger settings on page 772 Manual operation See Clock Source on page 114 Handling list files SOURce hw BB DM CLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM FLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM MLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM DLISt CATalog Reads out the list files present in the default directory see MMEMory CDIRectory List type Command File ...

Page 790: ...is created The file extension can be omitted Refer to Chapter 13 5 2 Accessing files in the default or in a specified directory on page 662 for general information on file handling in the default and a specific direc tory List type Command File extension Data list DLISt dm_iqd Control list CLISt dm_iqc User standard ULISt dm_stu User filter files FLISt vaf User mapping lists MLISt vam Parameters S...

Page 791: ...ing Example See Example Performing general tasks on page 770 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select Data List on page 120 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt FREE SOURce hw BB DM FLISt FREE SOURce hw BB DM MLISt FREE SOURce hw BB DM DLISt FREE Queries the list free memory List type Command File extension Data list DLISt dm_iqd Control list CLISt dm_iqc User filter files FLISt vaf User mapping lists MLIS...

Page 792: ...are then ignored Parameters Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example SOURce BB DM DLISt POINts 234 Defines the number of bits in the data list to be utilized as 234 bits If the list was filled with block data at least the last 6 bits are ignored SOURce hw BB DM FLISt POINts SOURce hw BB DM MLISt POINts Queries the user modulation mapping user filter list length Return values Points integer ...

Page 793: ...alue of bits Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 LSB 1 2 4 Burst LSB 16 LevAtt1 LSB 32 CWMod LSB 64 Hop MSB 128 The data can also be sent as a binary block each binary block being a 2 byte value in which the 16 bits represent the binary values 16 bit unsigned integer 2 bytes LSB first When binary data transmission is in use use the com mand SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI to set the termination cha...

Page 794: ...ii PACKed each byte being interpreted as 8 data bits When binary data transmission is in use use the com mand SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI to set the termination character mode to EOI control data message only so that a random LF in the data sequence is not interpreted as End thereby prematurely terminating the data transmis sion The command LTER STAN resets the mode According to the sp...

Page 795: ... only SOURce hw BB DM CLISt TAG SOURce hw BB DM DLISt TAG Queries the content of the specified tag in the selected file Return values Tag control list tag name Refer to Chapter 4 6 5 Tags for waveforms data and control lists on page 177 for description of the available tag formats Example SOURce1 BB DM DLISt TAG D_list date Queries the Date tag in list D_list Usage Query only 13 16 4 3 SOURce BB A...

Page 796: ... 1MHz SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 100 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE PHASe 90 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed var user ARBtestSignals sineTest SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle FREQuency 100KHz SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle SAMPles 1000 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle AMPLitude 0 5 SOURce BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle OFFSet 0 3 SOURce BB ARBitrary T...

Page 797: ...mment Waveform for test purposes to query the date tag of a specific waveform file SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA var user ARBtestSigs waveformTest date 2192014 04 15 16 19 30 Clock settings SOURce BB ARBitrary CLOCk SOURce INTernal SOURce BB ARBitrary CLOCk 100000000 or alternativelly use SOURce BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG CLOCK Configure and enable standard marker signals SOURce BB ARBitrary TR...

Page 798: ...Rce BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXEC Example Specifying delay and inhibit values in time units The following example lists the commands necessary to configure the instrument as described in Specifying delay and inhibit values on page 101 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary CLOCk 1000000 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuence AAUT SOURce1 BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce EGT1 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary TRIGger DELay UNIT SAMP SOURc...

Page 799: ...guration file config inf_mswv SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend Seg_1 SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend Seg_2 SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend Seg_3 SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure BLANk APPend 1000 100000000 adds a blank segment with 1000 samples and 100 MHz clock rate SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure LEVel MODE ERMS SOURce...

Page 800: ...d and loaded in the ARB see Exam ple Creating a multi segment waveform on page 798 The required output order of the segments is Seg_0 Seg_3 2 Seg_2 Select a multi segment waveform MMEM CDIR var user ARB multi_segment SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CATalog config SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect config SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe var user ARB multi_segment ms_0...

Page 801: ...ion of the instrument Example Using the ARB sequencer The following example lists the commands necessary to configure a play list The example lists only the relevant commands We assume that the multi segment sequence ms_0to3 composed of four segments Seg_0 Seg_1 Seg_2 and Seg_3 is created and loaded in the ARB see Exam ple Creating a multi segment waveform on page 798 The required output order of ...

Page 802: ...ng example lists the commands necessary to add two marker signals a sequence restart marker and a segment restart marker to the multi segment sequence The example lists only the relevant commands Select the multi segment file and the corresponding configuration list MMEM CDIR var lists ARB multi_segment SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CATalog Response config SOURce BB ARBitrary WSEGment CON...

Page 803: ...ARRier2 STATe ON SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier3 STATe ON SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier4 STATe ON Select and load the waveform file 3gpp_arb to all 4 carriers the file 3gpp_arb is in default directory SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier1 FILE 3gpp_arb SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier2 FILE 3gpp_arb SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier3 FILE 3gpp_arb SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCAR...

Page 804: ...NOTCh1 COUNt 3 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh1 STATe 1 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh1 FREQuency OFFSet 0 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh1 BWIDth RELative 3 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh1 BWIDth ABSolute 30000 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh2 FREQuency OFFSet 25000000 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh2 BWIDth ABSolute 20000 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh2 BWIDth RELative 2 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary NOTCh3 FREQuency OFFSet 25000000 SO...

Page 805: ...ker on page 156 Test signal commands SOURce hw BB ARBitrary SIGNal TYPE 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ I 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ Q 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle AMPLitude 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle FREQuency 806 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle OFFSet 807 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle SAMPles 807 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIG...

Page 806: ...e 1 to 1 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Default unit FS Example See Example Creating test signals on page 796 Manual operation See I Value Q Value on page 160 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the digital amplitude of the rectangular wave Parameters Amplitude float Range 0 to 1 Increment 0 001 RST 0 800 Default unit FS Example see Example Creating test signals on page 796 Ma...

Page 807: ... values required for the rectangular signal per period Parameters Samples integer Range 4 to 1000 RST 100 Example See Example Creating test signals on page 796 Manual operation See Samples per Period on page 159 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the simple sinusoidal test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 100 to depends on the installed options Inc...

Page 808: ...ples integer Range 4 to 1000 RST 100 Example see Example Creating test signals on page 796 Manual operation See Samples per Period on page 157 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate NAMed Filename SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle CREate NAMed Filename SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate NAMed Filename Generates a signal and saves it to a waveform file Setting parameters Filename ...

Page 809: ...e applies for all commands described in this section By default the waveform files are saved in the default directory of the instrument that is the var user directory or the directory specified with the command MMEMory CDIRectory To access the waveform files in this default directory only the file name is required without the path and the file extension wv However to access waveform files located ...

Page 810: ...nteger Number of waveform files in default directory Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform SELect Filename Selects an existing waveform file i e file with extension wv Parameters Filename string Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See Load Waveform File on page 155 SOURc...

Page 811: ...ce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA Tag The setting command writes the binary block data data to the file identified by filename The complete content of the waveform file i e including all tags must be specified the complete content is transmitted as binary data block Tip To ensure trouble free data transmission set the GPIB delimiter to EOI The query command retrieves the content of the specified ta...

Page 812: ...the actual ASCII values are not printable SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG Queries the content of the specified tag of the selected waveform file see also Chap ter 4 6 5 Tags for waveforms data and control lists on page 177 Return values Tag comment copyright date lacpfilter marker name poweroffset samples Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB ARB...

Page 813: ...e Chapter 4 9 1 Required options on page 200 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment 813 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NAME 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT SOURce 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent CATalog 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQu...

Page 814: ...the segments on page 800 Usage Query only Manual operation See Current Segment Current Segment Index on page 219 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT Next Selects the segment to be output Parameters Next integer Range 0 to 1023 RST 0 Example see Example Configuring the output order of the segments on page 800 Manual operation See Segment on page 219 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute Tri...

Page 815: ...Rce1 BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe HIGHest Manual operation See Level Mode on page 221 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent CATalog Queries the segments of the currently selected configuration file Return values Catalog string Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 798 Usage Query only Manual operation See Segment Table on page 210 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment ...

Page 816: ...egment is processed after the processing of the current one is finished Example See Example Using the ARB sequencer on page 801 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Append on page 218 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate FilenameInput Creates a multi segment waveform wv using the current settings of the specified configuration file inf_mswv Setting parameters FilenameInput Complete file path ...

Page 817: ...cessed Parameters Mode IGNore TAKE RST TAKE Example see Example Adding extra marker signals on page 802 Manual operation See Segment Marker on page 213 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer ESEGment Mode SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer FSEGment Mode Enables disables the generation of an additional marker restart signal at the beginning of the first segment FSEGment or a...

Page 818: ...B ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure LEVel MODE 819 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure COMMent 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect 821 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure BLANk APPend SampCount Frequency Adds a...

Page 819: ...ST max SampleRate Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 798 Manual operation See User Clock Rate on page 213 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE Mode Selects the clock rate mode for the multi segment waveform Use the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk to define the clock in clock mode user Parameters Mode UNCHanged HIGHest USER RST UNCH...

Page 820: ...page 798 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Append Delete Shift Seg Up Down on page 211 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe OFile Defines the file name of the output multi segment waveform Parameters OFile string Example See Example Creating a multi segment waveform on page 798 Manual operation See Save List Save List As on page 208 See Output file on page 209 See Create Create an...

Page 821: ...MCARrier CARRier COUNt 823 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier MODE 823 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier SPACing 823 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SAMPles 824 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME 824 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CFACtor MODE 824 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CFACtor 825 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CUToff 825 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier C...

Page 822: ...OURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier PRESet Sets all the multi carrier parameters to their default values Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier PRESet Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 235 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing CATalog Queries the available settings files in the specified default directory Only files with the file extension arb_multcarr are listed Return values Ca...

Page 823: ...i carrier waveform Parameters Count integer Range 1 to 512 RST 1 Example See Example Generating a multi carrier signal on page 802 Manual operation See Number of Carriers on page 235 See Number of Carriers on page 241 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier MODE Mode The command sets the carrier frequency mode Parameters Mode EQUidistant ARBitrary RST EQUidistant Example BB ARB MCAR CARR MODE EQU ...

Page 824: ...e1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier SAMPles Queries the file size of the currently calculated multi carrier waveform Usage Query only Manual operation See File Size on page 239 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME Time Sets the user defined signal period Parameters Time float Range 0 to 1E9 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier MODE USER Selects signal period mode user SOU...

Page 825: ...ffect Parameters CFactor float Range 50 to 50 Increment 0 01 RST 50 Default unit dB Example See SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping STATe on page 825 Manual operation See Target Crest Factor on page 236 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLIPping CUToff Cutoff Sets the cutoff frequency of the final low pass filter if baseband clipping is enabled Parameters Cutoff float Range 0 to 50E6 Increment ...

Page 826: ... Q files are periodically repeated Manual operation See Signal Period Mode on page 237 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier POWer REFerence Reference Defines the way the individual carriers in a composed multi carrier signal are leveled Parameters Reference RMS PEAK RST RMS Manual operation See Power Reference on page 237 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe OFile Defines the output file name for the ...

Page 827: ...turn values Clock float Range 400 to Max Increment 1E 3 Example BB ARB MCAR CLOC Queries the ARB multi carrier output clock rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Clock Rate on page 239 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CREate Creates a multi carrier waveform using the current settings of the carrier table Use the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe to define the multi carrier waveform...

Page 828: ...ion See Carrier Freq MHz on page 241 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch PHASe Phase Sets the start phase of the selected carrier Parameters Phase float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier19 PHASe 90 Sets a start phase Manual operation See Phase on page 241 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch POWer Power Sets the gain ...

Page 829: ...e selected carrier Parameters File file name Example See Example Generating a multi carrier signal on page 802 Manual operation See File on page 241 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch CONFlict Queries carrier conflicts A conflict arises when the carriers overlap Return values Conflict 1 ON 0 OFF 0 No conflict RST 0 Example BB ARB MCAR CARR CONF Usage Query only Manual operation See on page...

Page 830: ...power of the carriers in the defined carrier range is incremented Parameters Step float Range 80 to 80 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW 80dB Sets a power of 80 dB for the carriers in the carrier range BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW STEP 1 dB The power is incremented by 1dB for each carrier That is the first carrier has 80 dB the second 79 dB and so on Manual operat...

Page 831: ...by 1 for each carrier That is the first carrier has a start phase of 90 the second a start phase of 91 and so on SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt Start Sets the start phase for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range Parameters Start float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR PHAS 90 DEG sets a start phase of 90 ...

Page 832: ... Default unit s Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR DEL 5us Sets a start delay of 5 us for the carriers in the carrier range Manual operation See Delay Start on page 244 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier FILE File Selects the input file The data of the file are modulated onto the carriers in the defined carrier range Parameters File string Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR FILE var user temp IQ_w...

Page 833: ...ency OFFSet 834 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch BWIDth ABSolute 835 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh ch BWIDth ABSolute 835 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch BWIDth ABSolute 835 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative 835 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative 835 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative 835 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh APPLy 835 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh APPLy 835 SOURce hw BB ARBitrar...

Page 834: ...age 804 Manual operation See Number of Notches on page 196 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch STATe NotchState SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh ch STATe NotchValEnable SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch STATe ValEnable Enables the particular notch Parameters ValEnable 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Creating notch filter on page 804 Manual operation See State on page 197 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch FREQuency OF...

Page 835: ...Notch Bandwidth MHz on page 197 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative BwPct SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative BwPct SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative NoBwRel Sets the notch bandwidth relative to current clock frequency SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh CLOCk The value is interdependet with the absolute bandwidth value set with the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary NOTCh ch BWI...

Page 836: ...ary TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 840 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuence Sequence The command selects the trigger mode Parameters Sequence AUTO RETRigger AAUTo ARETrigger SINGle RST AUTO Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See Mode on page 109 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger signal source and determines the way the triggering is...

Page 837: ...efines the length of the signal sequence that is output in the SINGle trigger mode Parameters SLength integer Maximun value dependents on the selected units SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SLUNit as follows SAMPle Max 232 1 SEQuence Max 1000 Range 1 to dynamic RST 1 Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SLUNit SLUnit Defines the unit for the entry of...

Page 838: ...er event Parameters Output 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See Sync Output to External Trigger Sync Output to Trigger on page 111 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger PTIMe between the input of the external trigger event and the output of the baseband signal Return values ArbTrigProcTime string Example SOURce1 BB ARBitrary TRIGger PTIMe Response ...

Page 839: ...e 796 Manual operation See Specified External Delay Specified Trigger Delay on page 112 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal TDELay ExtTimeDelay Specifies the trigger delay for external triggering The value affects all external trigger signals Maximum trigger delay and trigger inhibit values depend on the installed options See Specifying delay and inhibit values on page 101 Parameters ExtTimeDe...

Page 840: ...1 47 clock frequency RST 0 Default unit samples Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See External Trigger Inhibit on page 111 Marker commands SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE 840 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime 841 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime 841 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern 841 SOURce hw BB A...

Page 841: ...ger OUTPut ch OFFTime OffTime Sets the number of samples in the ON and OFF periods Parameters OffTime integer Range 1 to 14913079 RST 1 Example see Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 161 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern Pattern BitCount Defines the bit pattern used to generate the marker signal Parameters Pattern numeric RST H2 BitC...

Page 842: ...iles on page 796 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 161 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay Delay Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the sig nals Parameters Delay integer Range 0 to depends on other values Increment 1 RST 0 Default unit Symbol Example See Example Managing waveform files on page 796 Manual operation See Mark...

Page 843: ... page 796 Manual operation See Clock Source on page 114 13 16 4 4 SOURce BB MCCW subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the Multi Carrier CW signals The generation of multi carrier CW signals requires an instrument equipped with the software options R S SMM K61 Common Suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description SOURce ch 1 A...

Page 844: ... Store the settings file in the specified directory the complete path and filename has to be specified To visualize the configured signal Switch to local mode with the command NREN Open the Multi carrier Continuous Wave Carrier Graph Generating a multi carrier signal to test the image rejection of an SSB filter Reset the instrument first RST CLS Configuring and enabling the multi carrier signal SO...

Page 845: ...just the settings of a group of carriers SOURce BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer 6 12 18 12 6 0 Set the power levels for carriers no 0 to 5 to 10dB 15dB 20dB 15dB 10dB 0dB SOURce BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Set the state of the carriers no 0 to 7 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt 15 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP 35 SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STATe ON SOURce BB MCCW EDIT CARRi...

Page 846: ...MCCW TRIGger OUTPut1 MODE RESTart SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut2 MODE PULSe SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut2 PULSe DIVider 5 SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut2 PULSe FREQuency SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut3 MODE PATTern SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut3 PATTern HE0F52 20 SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut1 MODE RATio SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut1 ONTime 40 SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut1 OFFTime 20 SOURce BB MC...

Page 847: ...DE 849 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor 849 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor ACTual 849 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier STATe 849 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe 850 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier PHASe 850 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe 851 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier POWer 851 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer 852 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt 852 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STARt 852 S...

Page 848: ...of Carriers on page 250 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier SPACing Spacing Sets the carrier spacing Parameters Spacing float Value range depends on the available bandwidth and the num ber of carriers see Cross reference between total bandwidth carrier spacing and number of carriers on page 250 Range 0 to depends on the installed options e g 120E6 Increment 0 01 RST 10E3 Example See Programming examples on ...

Page 849: ...peration See Optimize Crest Factor Mode on page 251 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor CFactor Sets the desired crest factor if the optimization mode target crest factor is used Parameters CFactor float Range 0 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 3 Example See Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Desired Crest Factor on page 251 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor ACTual Queries the actual Crest Factor for opt...

Page 850: ...ed to enter all the values every time Values not set by the value list are set with the default values provided they have already been explicitly set by a previous command If this is the case the values continue to apply until overwrit ten Setting parameters Stat0 Stat1 ON OFF Query parameters Start integer start carrier index Range 0 to lastCarrier Count integer number of carriers in the carrier ...

Page 851: ...etting parameters Phas0 Phas1 float Range 0 to 360 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Query parameters Start integer start carrier index Range 0 to lastCarrier Count integer number of carriers in the carrier range starting from the Start carrier Range 1 to max Return values Phas Phas float Example see Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 253 SOURce hw BB M...

Page 852: ...rn values Pow Pow float Example see Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 253 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt Start SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STARt Start Sets the power pahse for the starting carrier The power of the remaining carriers is stepped up or down by the power specified with the SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STEP command ...

Page 853: ...ee Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Power Step on page 253 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt Start SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STOP Stop Defines the first last carrier in the carrier range to which joint configuration applies Parameters Stop integer Range 0 to 8191 RST 0 Example See Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Carrier Start Stop on page 252 SOUR...

Page 854: ...W TRIGger EXTernal DELay 856 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 856 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SEQuence 856 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger ARM EXECute Stops signal generation Example See Programming examples on page 843 Usage Event Manual operation See Arm on page 110 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXECute Executes a trigger Example See Programming examples on page 843 Usage Event Manual operation Se...

Page 855: ...110 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger signal source and determines the way the triggering is executed Provided are Internal triggering by a command INTernal External trigger signal via one of the local or global connectors EGT1 EGT2 External global trigger EGC1 EGC2 External global clock In primary secondary instrument mode the external baseband synchronization sig nal BB...

Page 856: ...e number of samples by which a restart is inhibited following an external trigger event Maximum trigger delay and trigger inhibit values depend on the installed options See Specifying delay and inhibit values on page 101 Parameters Inhibit integer Range 0 to 21 47 clock frequency RST 0 Default unit sample Example See Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See External Trigger Inhibit on...

Page 857: ...n page 93 Parameters Mode RESTart PULSe PATTern RATio RST RESTart Example See Programming examples on page 843 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 113 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime OnTime SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime OffTime Sets the number of samples in the off period of the corresponding marker signal Parameters OffTime integer Range 1 to 16777215 RST 1 Example s...

Page 858: ...E 3 Example see Programming examples on page 843 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 113 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay Delay Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the sig nals expressed as number of samples Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 16777215 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See Programming examples on page 843 Manual operatio...

Page 859: ...re noise signal with specified bandwidth and noise level SOURce1 AWGN MODE ONLY SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth 3840000 SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth RATio 2 SOURce1 AWGN STATe ON SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth NOISe Response 7680000 SOURce1 AWGN FREQuency CENTer OFFSet 1000000 Shifts the noise signal by 1 MHz relative to the carrier frequency SOURce1 AWGN DISP MODE RFA SOURce1 AWGN POWer NOISe 80 SOURce1 POWer LEVel IMMediate AM...

Page 860: ...al with Channel Bandwidth 1 4 GHz i e Occupied Bandwidth 1 080 MHz RF Frequency 1 950 GHz RF Level 76 dBm Required is an SNR of 12 7 dB SOURce1 FREQuency CW 1950000000 SOURce1 POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude 76 SOURce1 AWGN MODE ADD set the system bandwidht to the occupied bandwidth SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth 1080000 SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth RATio 1 5 SOURce1 AWGN STATe ON SOURce1 AWGN BWIDth NOISe Response 1...

Page 861: ... 863 SOURce hw AWGN CNRatio 864 SOURce hw AWGN ENRatio 864 SOURce hw AWGN POWer CARRier 864 SOURce hw AWGN POWer NOISe 865 SOURce hw AWGN POWer NOISe TOTal 865 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM 865 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM PEP 865 SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency CENTer OFFSet 866 SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency TARGet 866 SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency RESult 866 SOURce hw AWGN STATe State Activates or deactivates the AWGN ge...

Page 862: ...00 to 80E6 Increment 100 RST 3 84E6 Example See Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 860 Manual operation See System Bandwidth on page 268 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth RATio Ratio Sets the ratio of minimum real noise bandwidth to system bandwidth see also Signal and noise parameters on page 263 Parameters Ratio float Range 1 to Max Increment 0 1 RST 1 Example see Example Generating an addi...

Page 863: ...cts the mode for setting the noise level Parameters Mode CN SN EN RST SN Example see Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 860 Manual operation See Set Noise Power Via on page 270 SOURce hw AWGN POWer RMODe RMode Determines whether the carrier or the noise level is kept constant when the C N value or Eb N0 value is changed Parameters RMode CARRier NOISe RST CARRier Example See Exampl...

Page 864: ...ise signal on page 860 Manual operation See Carrier Noise Ratio Signal Noise Ratio on page 270 SOURce hw AWGN ENRatio EnRatio Sets the ratio of bit energy to noise power density Parameters EnRatio float Range 50 to depends on the installed options Increment 0 01 RST 15 84 Default unit dB Example See Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 860 Manual operation See Eb N0 on page 271 SOUR...

Page 865: ...ment 0 01 RST 30 Example see Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 860 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Power Total Bandwidth on page 273 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM Queries the overall power of the noise interferer signal plus useful signal Return values Sum float Range 145 to 20 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example see Example Generating an additive noise signal on page 860 Usage Q...

Page 866: ...arameters CenterFreqOffs float Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Generating a pure noise signal on page 859 Manual operation See Center Frequency Offset on page 268 SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency TARGet Target Sets the desired frequency of the sine wave Parameters Target float Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example see Example Generating a CW interferer signal on page ...

Page 867: ...airment RF ch IQRatio MAGNitude 868 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage I 869 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q 869 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch LEAKage I 869 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch LEAKage Q 869 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch LEAKage I 869 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch LEAKage Q 869 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage I 869 SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage Q 869 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QU...

Page 868: ...trigger and vice versa Table 13 2 Value range Output Min Max Resolution RF ch 0 10E 6 1E 12 IQOutput ch 500E 9 500E 9 1E 12 500E 9 500E 9 1E 12 Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 10E 6 Increment 1E 12 RST 0 Example SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 DELay 32 0E 9 Manual operation See IQ Delay on page 281 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude Magnitude SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch IQRatio MAGNitude IqRati...

Page 869: ... SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch LEAKage Q Q SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage I I SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch LEAKage Q Q Determines the leakage amplitude of the I or Q signal component of the corresponding stream Parameters Q float Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example SOURce BB IMPairment RF1 LEAKage Q 4 PCT Sets the leakage for the Q component to 4 percent Manual operation See I Q Offse...

Page 870: ...KEW Skew SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch SKEW Skew Sets a delay between the Q vector and the I vector of the corresponding stream Parameters Skew float Range 500E 9 to 500E 9 Increment 1E 12 RST 0 Manual operation See Skew on page 281 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment STATe State SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch STATe State SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch STATe State SOURce BB IMPairment RF ch STATe State Activates...

Page 871: ... selected here is used also as optimization mode for the user defined frequency response corrections and vice versa See user manual R S SMM K544 User Defined Frequency Response Correction Parameters Mode FAST QHIGh QHTable FAST Optimization by compensation for I Q skew QHTable Improved optimization by maintained speed QHIGh Optimization by compensation for I Q skew and frequency response correctio...

Page 872: ...tor diagram graphics mode Manual operation See Mode on page 430 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics SRATe MODE Mode Sets how the time resolution of the signal is determined Maximum resolution corre sponds to a diagram covering the entire signal bandwidth The higher the resolution is the shorter the length of the displayed signal segment will be for the specified record ing depth Parameters Mode AUTO FULL USER R...

Page 873: ...URce BB GRAPhics ADD Size Adds a graphical signal display according to the current MODE SOURce SRATe and TRIGger settings Setting parameters Size MAXimized MINimized Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add on page 431 SOURce BB GRAPhics SOURce Source Defines the signal acquisition point that is the location in the signal flow where the dis played signal is tapped from See Chapter 8 1 2 2 Signa...

Page 874: ...of the power values in the power spectrum diagram Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Normalized power in dBFS 0 Shows power distribution in dB Hz RST 0 Example SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTFscale PSPectrum SOURce BB GRAPhics FFTFscale 1 the power spectrum shows the normalized power in dBFS Manual operation See Full Scale dBFS on page 430 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics TRIGger SOURce Source Defines the trigger for the ...

Page 875: ...he calculation of a signal in accordance to a digital standard or the calculation of a multi carrier or multi segment waveform file Return values WSegment integer Indicates the task progress in percent Range 0 to 100 RST 100 Example See Example Querying the status of the Create Waveform file process on page 875 Usage Query only 13 16 5 SOURce CORRection subsystem The SOURce CORRection subsystem co...

Page 876: ...iles in the default directory Select a file or create a new one RST CLS SOURce1 CORRection CSET CATalog Response shows the name of available user correction files if applicable Select a file SOURce1 CORRection CSET SELect var user ucor1 Create a new file if not existing SOURce1 CORRection CSET SELect var user ucor2 Enter the frequency level value pairs in the table existing data is overwritten Que...

Page 877: ... CORRection VALue 52 13 Example User correction data exchange The following example shows a command sequence to export a user correction list here the list created with the example before into an ASCII file Further hardware set tings are not considered Select a user correction file for exporting to file in ASCII format Set ASCII data parameters Set the ASCII file extension the decimal separator an...

Page 878: ...Rection CSET SELect Parameters Frequency Frequency 1 Frequency 2 String of values with default unit Hz Example See Example Create a table with user defined correction values for the RF level on page 876 Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data on page 353 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA POWer Power Enters the level values to the table selected with SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect Parameters Power ...

Page 879: ...See Fill User Correction Data with Sensor on page 402 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect Filename Selects or creates a file for the user correction data If the file with the selected name does not exist a new file is created Parameters Filename string Filename or complete file path file extension can be omitted Example See Example Create a table with user defined correction values for the RF level o...

Page 880: ...en frequencies Suffix SENSor ch Defines the used power sensor i e the sensor whose values are used Example See Example Fill user correction data with sensor on page 877 Usage Event SOURce hw CORRection STATe State Activates user correction with the currently selected table Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Create a table with user defined correction values for the RF level on p...

Page 881: ...sts and export or import them accordingly SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of user correction data in the cur rent or specified directory Return values Catalog string List of ASCII files txt or csv separated by commas Example See Example Create a table with user defined correction values for the RF level on page 876 Usage Query onl...

Page 882: ...data exchange on page 877 Manual operation See ASCII File Settings on page 350 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal Decimal Sets the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Parameters Decimal DOT COMMa RST DOT Example See Example User correction data exchange on page 877 Manual operation See ASCII File Settings on page...

Page 883: ...requency response correction requires option R S SMM100A K544 See user manual R S SMM K544 User Defined Frequency Response Correction Example Enabling high quality optimization SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization MODE QHIG SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth MODE AUTO SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth VALue 160000000 SOURce1 CORRection FRESponse RF ...

Page 884: ...SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization MODE QHIG QHT sets how the signal bandwidth is estimated automatically or manually with the command SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization BANDwidth VALue Parameters FreqRespOptBwMo AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example See Example Enabling high quality optimization on page 883 Manual operation See Optimization Bandwidth on page 291 SOURce hw CORRectio...

Page 885: ...n FRESponse RF OPTimization LOCal For SOURce hw CORRection FRESponse RF OPTimization MODEQHIG triggers optimization for the current settings Example See Example Enabling high quality optimization on page 883 Usage Event Manual operation See Optimize for current setting on page 291 13 16 6 SOURce FREQuency subsystem The SOURce FREQuency subsystem contains the commands used to define the fre quency ...

Page 886: ...enerators Signal generator 1 One path instrument uses its internal oscillator signal Signal generator 1 Two paths instrument receives the LO signal from the first instrument and assigns it to both paths Signal generator 3 One path instrument receives the LO signal from the second instrument Address and reset the first instrument RST CLS Configure the oscillator signal of the first instrument SOURc...

Page 887: ... 887 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator MODE 888 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator OUTPut FREQuency 888 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator OUTPut STATe 888 SOURce hw FREQuency MODE 889 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed 889 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL 890 SOURce hw FREQuency MANual 891 SOURce hw FREQuency MULTiplier 891 SOURce hw FREQuency OFFSet 891 SOURce hw FREQuency CENTer 892 SOURce hw FREQuency SPAN ...

Page 888: ...ncy LOSCillator OUTPut FREQuency Queries the current frequency of the local oscillator at the LO Out connector Return values Frequency float Range 100E3 to 20E9 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See Example Set up of LO coupling and LO level adjustment with three Rohde Schwarz signal generators on page 886 Usage Query only Manual operation See LO OUT Frequency on page 308 SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillato...

Page 889: ...Rce hw FREQuency SPAN on page 892 SOURce hw FREQuency MANual on page 891 LIST Sets list mode The instrument processes frequency and level settings by means of values loaded from a list To configure list mode settings use the commands of the Chap ter 13 16 11 SOURce LIST subsystem on page 914 RST CW Example See Example Frequency configuration on page 885 and Example Setup an RF frequency or power s...

Page 890: ...T 100 MHz Example See Example Frequency configuration on page 885 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Options RFmax depends on the installed options for example 3 GHz with R S SMM B1006 Manual operation See Frequency on page 298 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL Rcl Set whether the RF frequency value is retained or taken from a loaded instrument con figuration when ...

Page 891: ...ation factor NFREQ MULT of a subsequent downstream instrument The parameters offset fFREQ OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ MULT affect the frequency value set with the command FREQ The query FREQ returns the value corresponding to the formula fFREQ fRFout NFREQ MULT fFREQ OFFSer See RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument on page 296 Parameters Multiplier float Range 10000 to 10000 ...

Page 892: ...eters Center float Range 300 kHz to RFmax Increment 0 01 Hz RST 300E6 Default unit Hz Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 342 SOURce hw FREQuency SPAN Span Sets the sapn of the frequency sweep range See Chapter 7 10 2 1 Correlating parameters in sweep mode on page 329 Parameters Span float Full freqeuncy range Increment...

Page 893: ...Default unit Hz Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Start Frequency Stop Frequency on page 341 SOURce hw FREQuency STEP MODE Mode Defines the type of step size to vary the RF frequency at discrete steps with the com mands FREQ UP or FREQ DOWN Parameters Mode DECimal USER DECimal Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten USER Increases or...

Page 894: ...99 13 16 7 SOURce INPut subsystem The SOURce INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for external modulation signals The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps and is effective in the List mode Instrument Trigger SOURce hw INPut MODext COUPling ch 894 SOURce hw INPut MODext IMPedance ch 895 SOURce hw INPut TRIGger SLOPe 895 SOURce hw INPut MODext COUPling ch Coup...

Page 895: ...anual operation See Trigger Slope on page 340 13 16 8 SOURce IQ subsystem The SOURce IQ subsystem contains the commands for configuring the I Q modula tion Required options See Chapter 6 1 Required options on page 284 SOURce hw IQ SOURce 895 SOURce hw IQ STATe 896 SOURce hw IQ GAIN 896 SOURce hw BB IQGain 896 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor 897 SOURce hw IQ SWAP STATe 897 SOURce hw IQ WBSTate 897 SOURce ...

Page 896: ...e IQ STAT ON Activates I Q modulation Manual operation See State on page 286 SOURce hw IQ GAIN Gain SOURce hw BB IQGain IqGain Optimizes the modulation of the I Q modulator for a subset of measurement require ment Parameters IqGain DBM4 DBM2 DB0 DB2 DB4 DB8 DB6 DBM3 DB3 AUTO Dynamic range of 16 dB divided into 2 dB steps DB0 DB2 DB4 DB6 DB8 Activates the specified gain of 0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB ...

Page 897: ...ernal analog signal Manual operation See Crest Factor on page 287 SOURce hw IQ SWAP STATe State Swaps the I and Q channel Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example IQ SWAP ON swaps the I and Q channel Manual operation See I Q Swap on page 286 SOURce hw IQ WBSTate WbState Activates I Q wideband mode Activation automatically optimizes the settings for wideband modulation signals with a bandwidth tha...

Page 898: ...e1 IQ OUTPut ANALog MODE VAR SOURce1 IQ OUTPut LEVel 2 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS COUPling STATe 1 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS I 1 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS Q 1 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet I 2 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet Q 2 5 SOURce1 IQ OUTPut ANALog STATe 1 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog STATe 898 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog PRESet 899 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing CATalog 899 S...

Page 899: ...he command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog STATe If SCONfiguration EXTernal PBEHaviour 1 the I Q ouptput type set with the command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE Example See Example Enabling and configuring the analog output on page 898 Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 478 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog SETTing CATalog Queries the files with I Q output settings in the default direct...

Page 900: ...ecified directory Deleted are files with the file extension iqout Setting parameters Filename filename Filename or complete file path Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 479 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE Type Sets the type of the analog signal Example SOURce1 IQ OUTPup ANALog TYPE DIFFerential Options DIFFerential requires R S SMM K17 Manual operation See I Q Output Type ...

Page 901: ...w IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS COUPling STATe State Couples the bias setting of the I and Q signal components Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Enabling and configuring the analog output on page 898 Manual operation See Couple I Q Bias on page 480 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS I I SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS Q Q Specifies the amplifier bias Vbias of the respective I or Q compone...

Page 902: ...log modulation Example Setup an LF sweep The following example shows a command sequence to set up an LF sweep Reset the instrument to start from an initial state RST CLS Set the trigger mode the sweep mode and the sweep range TRIGger1 LFFSweep SOURce SINGle SOURce1 LFOutput1 SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency STARt 1 kHz SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency STOP 7 kHz Select linear spaci...

Page 903: ...vely use UP or DOWN parameter with set step width SOURce1 LFOutput1 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 500 Hz SOURce1 LFOutput1 FREQuency MANual UP Example Configuring the LF generator The following is a simple example on how to configure the LF generator and output the generated signal configure the signal of the LF1 generator SOURce1 LFOutput1 SHAPe SQU SOURce1 LFOutput1 SHAPe PULSe PERiod 0 001 SOURce...

Page 904: ...LFOutput FREQuency MANual 905 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE 906 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STOP 906 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STARt 906 SOURce LFOutput ch STATe 907 SOURce LFOutput ch OFFSet 907 SOURce LFOutput ch SOURce 907 SOURce LFOutput ch SOURce PATH 907 SOURce LFOutput ch VOLTage 907 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe 908 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe DCYCle 908 SOURce hw LFOutput ch S...

Page 905: ...cy MODE SWE the fre quency is coupled with the sweep frequency Parameters Frequency float Range 0 1 to depends on the installed options R S SMM K24 Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Default unit Hz Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See Frequency on page 377 SOURce hw LFOutput ch PERiod Queries the repetition frequency of the sine signal Return values LfSinePeriod ...

Page 906: ...y settings Parameters Mode CW FIXed SWEep CW FIXed Sets the fixed frequency mode CW and FIXed are synonyms SWEep Sets sweep mode To set the frequency use the commands SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STARt and SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STOP Or SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MANual RST CW Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 902 Manual operation See State LF frequency sweep on page 338 SOURce...

Page 907: ...iguring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See DC Offset on page 382 SOURce LFOutput ch SOURce Source Determines the LF signal to be synchronized when monitoring is enabled Parameters Source LF1 LF2 NOISe AM FMPM EXT1 RST LF1 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See Source on page 381 SOURce LFOutput ch SOURce PATH SourPath Determines the path of...

Page 908: ...RIangle TRAPeze require R S SMM K24 Manual operation See Shape on page 377 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe DCYCle DCycle Sets the duty cycle for the shape pulse Parameters DCycle float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 1E 6 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See Pulse Duty Cycle on page 378 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe PERiod Peri...

Page 909: ...e LF generator Parameters Fall float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 10E 9 RST 250E 6 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See Trapezoid Rise Fall on page 378 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH High Sets the high time for the trapezoid signal of the LF generator Parameters High float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 10E 9 RST 250E 6 Example See Example Configu...

Page 910: ...l operation See Trapezoid Rise Fall on page 378 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle PERiod Period Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Parameters Period float Range 1E 6 to 100 Increment 10E 9 RST 0 001 Example See Example Configuring the LF generator on page 903 Manual operation See Period on page 377 SOURce hw LFOutput ch S...

Page 911: ...EP LOGarithmic 913 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 914 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl Dwell Sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep Parameters Dwell float Range 0 001 to 100 Increment 100E 6 RST 0 01 Default unit s Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 902 Manual operation See Dwell Time on page 340 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute Immedi...

Page 912: ...acing SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic logarithmic spacing RST AUTO Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 902 Manual operation See Mode on page 338 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts Points Sets the number of steps in an LF sweep For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other parameters see Chapter 7 10 2 1 Correlating parameters...

Page 913: ... on page 902 Manual operation See Shape on page 339 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing Spacing Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Parameters Spacing LINear LOGarithmic RST LINear Example See Example Setup an LF sweep on page 902 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic Logarithmic Sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps to calculate the frequencies of the step...

Page 914: ...lists and for han dling of list files List files have the predefined file extension lsw Refer to Chapter 13 5 2 Accessing files in the default or in a specified directory on page 662 for general information on file handling in the default and in a specific directory RST does not affect data lists SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode T...

Page 915: ...s Enable RF output SOUR1 LIST MODE AUTO SOUR1 LIST TRIG SOUR AUTO SOUR1 LIST DWEL MODE LIST OUTP1 STAT ON Use global dwell time Set only a part of the list value pairs 3 to 5 to be processed Configure the list mode parameters using global dwell time Enable RF output SOUR1 LIST IND START 2 SOUR1 LIST IND STOP 4 SOUR1 LIST MODE AUTO SOUR1 LIST TRIG SOUR AUTO SOUR1 LIST DWEL LIST 500 ms OUTP1 STAT ON...

Page 916: ...command sequence to export a list here the RF list created with the example before into an ASCII file Further hardware settings are not considered RST CLS LIST DEXC MODE EXP Set ASCII data parameters Set the ASCII file extension the decimal separator and the column separator for the ASCII data SOUR1 LIST DEXC AFIL EXT CSV SOUR1 LIST DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT SOUR1 LIST DEXC AFIL SEP COL COMM Select so...

Page 917: ...IST INDex 919 SOURce hw LIST INDex STARt 920 SOURce hw LIST INDex STOP 920 SOURce hw LIST RMODe 920 SOURce hw LIST LEARn 920 SOURce hw LIST MODE 921 SOURce hw LIST POWer 921 SOURce hw LIST POWer POINts 921 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger EXECute 922 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger SOURce 922 SOURce hw LIST RUNNing 923 SOURce hw LIST DWELl Dwell Sets the global dwell time The instrument generates the signal with the...

Page 918: ...rameters Dwell Dwell 1 Dwell 2 block data You can either enter the data as a list of numbers or as binary block data The list of numbers can be of any length with the list entries separated by commas In binary block format 8 4 bytes are always interpreted as a floating point number with double accuracy See also FORMat DATA on page 689 for more details Example See Example Create an RF list and acti...

Page 919: ...talled options Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 914 Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data on page 353 SOURce hw LIST FREQuency POINts Queries the number points of frequency entries in the seleced list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 914 Usage Query only SOURce h...

Page 920: ...RMode Selects the run mode for processing the list Parameters RMode LEARned LIVE LEARned Generates the signal by replaying the previously learned and saved data from the temporary memory LIVE Generates the signal by processing the list directly RST LIVE Example See Example Create an RF list and activate the list mode on page 914 Manual operation See Run Mode on page 347 SOURce hw LIST LEARn Learns...

Page 921: ...46 SOURce hw LIST POWer Power Enters the level values in the selected list The number of level values must corre spond to the number of frequency values Existing data is overwritten Parameters Power Power 1 Power 2 block data You can either enter the data as a list of numbers or as binary block data The list of numbers can be of any length with the list entries separated by commas In binary block ...

Page 922: ...the parameters which are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI designation should be used if compatibility is an important consideration For an overview see the following table Rohde Schwarz parameter SCPI parameter Applies to the list mode parameters AUTO IMMediate SOURce hw LIST MODE AUTO SINGle BUS SOURce hw LIST MODE AUTO or SOURce hw LIST MODE STEP EXTernal EXTernal SOURce hw LIST MODE AUT...

Page 923: ...ction covers basic commands to file handling in list mode SOURce hw LIST CATalog 923 SOURce hw LIST DELete 923 SOURce hw LIST DELete ALL 924 SOURce hw LIST FREE 924 SOURce hw LIST RESet 924 SOURce hw LIST SELect 925 SOURce hw LIST CATalog Queries the available list files in the specified directory Return values Catalog string List of list filenames separated by commas Example See Example Create an...

Page 924: ...UR1 LIST DEL var user list1 SOUR1 LIST CAT my_list SOUR1 FREQ MODE LIST SOUR1 LIST SEL var user my_list lsw deactivate list mode SOUR1 FREQ MODE CW SOUR1 LIST DELete ALL SOUR1 LIST CAT all list files are deleted Usage Event Manual operation See List Mode Data on page 349 SOURce hw LIST FREE Queries the amount of free memory in bytes for list mode lists Return values Free integer Range 0 to INT_MAX...

Page 925: ...s you can configure lists in ASCII format and export or import them accordingly SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe CATalog 925 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange EXECute 926 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension 926 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect 926 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn 926 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal 926 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange MODE 927 SOURce hw LIST...

Page 926: ... File Settings on page 350 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect Filename Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported Parameters Filename string Filename or complete file path file extension can be omitted Example See Example List mode data exchange on page 916 Manual operation See Select ASCII Source Select ASCII Destination on page 351 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn Column...

Page 927: ...t EXPort RST IMPort Example See Example List mode data exchange on page 916 Manual operation See Mode on page 350 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange SELect Filename Selects the ASCII file for import or export containing a list Parameters Filename string Filename or complete file path file extension can be omitted Example See Example List mode data exchange on page 916 Manual operation See Select Source Sele...

Page 928: ...STATe 928 SOURce hw NOISe DISTribution 929 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel RELative 929 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute 929 SOURce hw NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth BWidth Sets the noise level in the system bandwidth when bandwidth limitation is enabled Parameters BWidth float Range 100E3 to 10E6 Increment 100E3 RST 100E3 Example See Example Configuring the noise generator on page 928 Manual operation See Bandwidth ...

Page 929: ... to 52 67 Increment 0 1 RST 69 84 Example See Example Configuring the noise generator on page 928 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Density on page 383 SOURce hw NOISe LEVel ABSolute Queries the level of the noise signal in the system bandwidth within the enabled band width limitation Return values Absolute float Noise level within the bandwidth limitation RST 3 84 MHz Example See Exampl...

Page 930: ...LTE Release 8 6d 3d occupy two licenses of option K55 for 3 days SOURce OCCupy OPTion R S SMM100A K55 3 2 extend the occupation period for the first license to 5 days SOURce OCCupy OPTion RENew 1 R S SMM100A K55 5 SOURce OCCupy OPTion 930 SOURce OCCupy OPTion CATalog 931 SOURce OCCupy OPTion RENew ch 931 SOURce OCCupy OPTion Occupies the selected option You can determine the option string the time...

Page 931: ...he occupation period on page 930 Usage Query only Manual operation See Occupy Licenses on page 555 SOURce OCCupy OPTion RENew ch Extends the occupation period of the selected license Parameters optString string Determines the option period Sets the occupation period Example See Example Occupying a license and extend the occupation period on page 930 Usage Event Manual operation See Renew on page 5...

Page 932: ...UTPut STATe 932 SOURce hw PGENerator STATe 933 SOURce hw PGENerator OUTPut POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal Parameters Polarity NORMal INVerted NORMal Outputs the pulse signal during the pulse width that means dur ing the high state INVerted Inverts the pulse output signal polarity The pulse output signal is suppressed during the pulse width but provided during the lo...

Page 933: ...em contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal relative to a reference signal of the same frequency Example Programming Example change the phase relative to the current phase SOURce1 PHASe 2 DEG adopt the setting as the current phase SOURce1 PHASe REFerence The following commands are available SOURce hw PHASe 933 SOURce hw PHASe REFerence 933 SOURce hw PHASe Phase Sets th...

Page 934: ...LC SLEVel 936 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation 937 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation DIGital 937 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE 937 SOURce hw POWer EMF STATe 938 SOURce hw POWer LBEHaviour 938 SOURce hw POWer LIMit AMPLitude 938 SOURce hw POWer LMODe 939 SOURce hw POWer MANual 939 SOURce hw POWer MODE 940 SOURce hw POWer PEP 940 SOURce hw POWer POWer 940 SOURce hw POWer STARt 941 SOURce hw POWer STOP...

Page 935: ...al ALC table ON Activates internal level control permanently OFF Deactivates internal level control Sample Hold mode is active ONSample Starts the internal level control with the first change ONTable Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues with automatic level control RST AUTO For more details on the individual settings an overview of the functionality and details on what ...

Page 936: ...ects the optimum sensitivity automatically FIXed Fixes the internal level detector RST AUTO Example POW ALC DSEN FIX Manual operation See Detector Sensitivity on page 392 SOURce hw POWer ALC SONCe Activates level control for correction purposes temporarily Example POW ALC OFF Deactivates automatic level control at the RF output POW ALC SONC Executes level control once Usage Event Manual operation ...

Page 937: ...ttDigital Sets a relative attenuation value for the baseband signal Parameters AttDigital float Range 3 522 to 80 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Manual operation See Digital Attenuation on page 303 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE Mode Selects the state the attenuator is to assume if the RF signal is switched off Parameters Mode UNCHanged FATTenuation FATTenuation The step attenuator switches to maxim...

Page 938: ...BEHaviour Behaviour Selects the level behavior at the RF output over time Parameters Behaviour AUTO UNINterrupted MONotone CVSWr CPHase UNINterrupted MONotone Do not use the uninterrupted level settings and strictly monotone modes in combination with the high quality optimization mode see SOURce hw BB IMPairment OPTimization MODE on page 871 CVSWr Constant VSWR CPHase Continuous phase CONStant Con...

Page 939: ...es a very pure sinewave signal RST NORMal Example SOURce1 POWer LMODe LOWD Sets low distortion mode The instrument reduces distortions of the RF signal to a minimum Manual operation See Mode on page 304 SOURce hw POWer MANual Manual Sets the level for the subsequent sweep step if SWE POW MODE MAN Use a separate command for each sweep step Parameters Manual float You can select any level within the...

Page 940: ...e Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See State RF level sweep on page 337 See State RF frequency level sweep on page 337 SOURce hw POWer PEP Queries the PEP Peak Envelope Power of digital modulation or digital standards at the RF output This value corresponds to the level specification displayed in the status bar header Return values Pep float Example POW PEP...

Page 941: ... range calculated as follows Level_min OFFSet to Level_max OFFSet Where the values are set with the commands SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet SOURce hw POWer STARt SOURce hw POWer STOP Range Minimum level to maximum level RST 30 Start 10 Stop Default unit dBm Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Start Level Stop Level on page 343 SOURce hw...

Page 942: ...the Up Down arrow keys Parameters Increment float Range 0 to 200 Increment 0 01 RST 1 Default unit dB Example See SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE on page 941 Manual operation See Variation Step on page 299 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset Sets the level offset of a downstream instrument The level at the RF output is not changed To query the resulting level as it is at the output of the down...

Page 943: ...nd RCL Manual operation See Exclude Level on page 496 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Amplitude Sets the RF level applied to the DUT To activate the RF output use command OUTPut hw STATe RF On RF Off The following applies POWer RF output level OFFSet where POWer is the values set with SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RF output level is set with SOURce hw POWer POWer OFFSet is se...

Page 944: ...e current interruption free range of the level Return values Upper float Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm Example SOURce1 POWer RANGe UPPer 15 SOURce1 POWer RANGe LOW 50 Usage Query only Manual operation See Level Range on page 304 13 16 17 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem The SOURce ROSCillator subsystem contains the commands for setting the exter nal and internal reference frequency The commands of t...

Page 945: ...Rce ROSCillator INTernal TUNing SLOPe LOW 10 MHz and 1 GHz output SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency MODE DER10M SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut ALTernate FREQuency MODE DER1G Using 10 MHz external reference source SOURce ROSCillator SOURce EXT SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal RFOFf STATe 1 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Response 10MHZ SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth WIDE SOURce ROSCillator IN...

Page 946: ...Ternal RFOFf STATe State Determines that the RF output is turned off when the external reference signal is selected but missing Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST n a factory preset 0 Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 945 Manual operation See Deactivate RF Output if external reference is missing on page 313 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Frequency Sets the freque...

Page 947: ...e synchronization bandwidth is a few Hz WIDE Uses the widest possible synchronization bandwidth RST n a factory preset Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 945 Manual operation See Synchronization Bandwidth on page 314 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal MLRange Queries the minimum locking range for the selected external reference frequency Depending on the RF hardware version ...

Page 948: ... 1GHZ Forwards the input reference frequency to the reference frequency output RST n a factory preset DER10M Example See Example Configuring the reference oscillator on page 945 Manual operation See Reference Output 1 GHz Reference Output on page 315 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut ALTernate FREQuency MODE OutpFreqMode Sets the output reference frequency Parameters OutpFreqMode LOOPthrough DER1G OFF OFF...

Page 949: ... Determines whether the calibrated off or a user defined on adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF 0 Fine adjustment with the calibrated frequency value 1 User defined adjustment value The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state The calibration value is however not changed The instrument resumes the calibrated state if you send SOURce ROSC...

Page 950: ...ower spacing defined with LINear only and the power step width defined with LOGarithmic only Reset the instrument to start from an initial state Switch off display update to improve performance especially with short dwell times Set the sweep mode first two commands and the sweep range Select linear spacing Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep RST CLS SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF TRIGger1...

Page 951: ...Quency MODE MANual Activate the RF frequency sweep SOURce1 FREQuency MODE SWEep Activate RF Output1 Output1 STATe 1 Input the frequency manually for each step SOURce1 FREQuency MANual 200 MHz SOURce1 FREQuency MANual 201 MHz Alternatively use the UP or DOWN commands with the set step width SOURce1 SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 1 MHz SOURce1 FREQuency MANual UP SOURce hw SWEep POWer DWELl 952 SOURce ...

Page 952: ...weep step Parameters Dwell float Range 0 001 to 100 Increment 100E 6 RST 0 01 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Dwell Time on page 340 SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE Mode Sets the cycle mode for the level sweep Parameters Mode AUTO MANual STEP AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active You can tr...

Page 953: ... sweep spacing for level sweeps is always linear Return values Mode LINear RST LINear Example SWE POW SPAC MODE queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep at RF output Result LIN linear spacing Usage Query only SOURce hw SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic Logarithmic Sets a logarithmically determined step size for the RF level sweep The level is increased by a logarithmically calculated fraction of the...

Page 954: ... vidually by input of the frequencies with the command SOURce hw FREQuency MANual STEP Each trigger event triggers one sweep step The frequency increases by the value entered with SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear linear spacing or SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic logarithmic spacing RST AUTO Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Mo...

Page 955: ... entered in Hz see SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear LOGarithmic Sets a constant fraction of the current frequency as step width and adds it to the current frequency The logarithmic step width is entered in see SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic RST LINear Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Spacing on page 339 SOURce hw SWEep POWer...

Page 956: ... you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode Single or External Single Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Retrace on page 339 SOURce hw SWEep POWer RUNNing SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RUNNing Queries the current sweep state Return values State 1 ON 0 OFF Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power ...

Page 957: ...hat the command is SCPI compliant Parameters Linear float Range 0 001 Hz to STOP STARt Increment 0 01 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Manual operation See Step Linear Step Logarithmic on page 342 SOURce hw COMBined FREQuency STARt CombFreqStart Sets the start frequency of the combined RF frequency level sweep See Chapter 7 10 2 1 Correlating parameters in sweep...

Page 958: ... an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 SOURce hw COMBined POWer STOP CombPowStop Sets the stop level value of the combined RF frequency level sweep Parameters CombPowStop float Range 245 to 120 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 SOURce hw SWEep COMBined COUNt StepCount Defines the number of sweeps you want to execute This parameter appli...

Page 959: ...in manual sweep mode selected with the command SOURce hw SWEep COMBined MODE MANual Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 Usage Event SOURce hw SWEep COMBined MODE SweepCombMode Sets the cycle mode for the combined frequency level sweep Parameters SweepCombMode AUTO MANual STEP AUTO Each trigger event triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is n...

Page 960: ... See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 SOURce hw SWEep COMBined SHAPe Shape Selects the waveform shape for the combined frequency level sweep sequence Parameters Shape SAWTooth TRIangle RST SAWTooth Example See Example Setup an RF frequency or power sweep on page 950 SOURce hw SWEep RESet ALL Resets all active sweeps to the starting point Usage Event Manual operation See Res...

Page 961: ...3 SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS query the data sheet information on a specific parameter defined by its ID SYSTem SPECification ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS returns the specified and if available the typical value of the parameter Example Retrieving information on network related settings SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STA...

Page 962: ...IB RESource GPIB 28 INSTR SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 28 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator STAN SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource ASRL1 INSTR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 1 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 115200 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity NONE Example Querying the error queue SYSTem ERRor STATic 221 Settings conflict 153 Input voltage out of range returns all static errors that...

Page 963: ...k COMMon HOSTname 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 975 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 975 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity 975 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource 975 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 976 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource 9...

Page 964: ...the error in FIFO order If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Volatile errors are reported once at the time they appear Identi cal errors are reported repeatedly only if the original error has already been retrieved from and hence not any more present in the error queue Example SYST ...

Page 965: ...Next string Returns the error number To retrieve the entire error text send the command SYSTem ERRor ALL 0 No error i e the error queue is empty Positive value Positive error numbers denote device specific errors Negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE Queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 No errors have occurred since the ...

Page 966: ...re present in the error queue Example SYST ERR Queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only Manual operation See Static Notifications History on page 1003 SYSTem ERRor GNEXt Similar to SYSTem ERRor NEXT but queries the next entry from the global per sistant error event queue Return values NextGlobal...

Page 967: ...t panel keyboard of the instrument and the Local key Parameters DispLockStat 1 ON 0 OFF RST n a factory preset 0 Example SYST DLOC ON Activates the display lock The instrument cannot be operated via the display until it has been enabled with SYST DLOC OFF Manual operation See User Interface on page 568 See Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation on page 569 SYSTem KLOCk State Disable...

Page 968: ... display the touchscreen and all controls for the manual operation DONLy Locks the touchscreen and controls for the manual operation of the instrument The display shows the current settings VNConly Locks the touchscreen and controls for the manual operation and enables remote operation over VNC The display shows the current settings TOFF Locks the touchscreen for the manual operation of the instru...

Page 969: ...tting only SYSTem LOCK REQuest EXCLusive Queries whether a lock for exclusive access to the instrument via ethernet exists If successful the query returns a 1 otherwise 0 Return values Success integer Example SYST LOCK REQ Queries the state of exclusive locking Response 1 The exclusive locking is active Usage Query only SYSTem SAV Pathname Saves the current R S SMM100A settings into a file with de...

Page 970: ...t 1 Setting parameters Key integer The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation of a level A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The default password for the first level is 123456 This protection level is required to unlock internal adjustments for example Example To activate protection level SYSTem PROT...

Page 971: ... rec ommended particularly for binary block transmissions as binary blocks may coincidentally contain a characater with value LF Line Feed although it is not determined as a terminator STANdard Recognizes an LF Line Feed as the terminator regardless of whether it is sent with or without EOI RST n a factory preset STANdard Example See Example Finding out the used VISA resource strings on page 962 S...

Page 972: ...he used VISA resource strings on page 962 Usage Query only Manual operation See HISLIP on page 602 See GPIB on page 602 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress IpAddress Sets the IP address Parameters IpAddress string Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example See Example Retrieving information on network related set tings on page 961 Manual operation See IP Address on page 600 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork I...

Page 973: ... Return values Resource string Example See Example Finding out the used VISA resource strings on page 962 Usage Query only Manual operation See VXI11 on page 602 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart Restarts the network Example See Example Restart network on page 962 Usage Event Manual operation See Restart Network on page 599 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus Queries the network configuration state...

Page 974: ...rs Hostname string Example See Example Retrieving information on network related set tings on page 961 Manual operation See Hostname on page 599 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup Workgroup Sets an individual workgroup name for the instrument Parameters Workgroup string Example See Example Retrieving information on network related set tings on page 961 Manual operation See Workgroup on pa...

Page 975: ... Defines the baudrate for the serial remote control interface Parameters Baud 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RST n a factory preset 115200 Example See Example Finding out the used VISA resource strings on page 962 Manual operation See Baud Rate on page 604 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity Parity Enters the parity for the serial remote control interface Parameters Parity NONE ODD EVEN RST ...

Page 976: ...ee Stop Bits on page 604 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface using TCP IP socket protocol Return values Resource string Example See Example Finding out the used VISA resource strings on page 962 Usage Query only Manual operation See Socket on page 602 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote con...

Page 977: ...Parameters Identification AUTO USER AUTO Automatically determines the strings USER User defined strings can be selected RST n a factory preset AUTO Example SYST IDEN AUTO Automatically assigns the OPT and IDN strings according to the selected instrument language Manual operation See Mode on page 605 SYSTem IDENtification PRESet Sets the IDN and OPT strings in user defined mode to default values Ex...

Page 978: ...rameters OResponse string Example SYST IDEN USER Selects a user defined identification SYST ORES Test Option Defines the OPT string test option OPT Response test option Manual operation See OPT String on page 605 SYSTem LANGuage Language Sets the remote control command set Parameters Language string Example SYSTem LANGuage SCPI selects SCPI command set Manual operation See Language on page 605 SYS...

Page 979: ...ters SecPassWord string Manual operation See Secure Update Policy on page 565 SYSTem SPECification Id Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter Setting parameters Id string Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet as queried with the command SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog on page 980 Return values ValList float Comma separated list with the specified and if a...

Page 980: ...SPECification PARameter Id Parameter Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter Setting parameters Id string Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet Query the data sheet parameters with the command SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog Parameter float An additional value the result ValList depends on Return values ValList float Comma separated list with the specifie...

Page 981: ... SCPI recording data from the internal file This feature enables you to transfer an instrument configuration to other test environ ments as e g laboratory virtual instruments Return values FileData block data Example SYSTem SRData 3118 SOURce1 ROSCillator SOURce EXT SOURce1 FREQuency CW 4000000000 SOURce1 FREQuency OFFSet 1000000 SOURce1 AM1 STATe 1 OUTPut1 STATe 1 Usage Query only SYSTem STARtup ...

Page 982: ...u can enter the IP address or the hostname of the time server or even set up an own vendor zone See the Internet for more informa tion on NTP Parameters NTPName string Manual operation See NTP Address on page 1015 SYSTem NTP STATe UseNtpState Activates clock synchronization via NTP Parameters UseNtpState 1 ON 0 OFF RST n a factory preset 0 Example SYSTem NTP STATe 1 Manual operation See Use Time f...

Page 983: ... TimeZone string Manual operation See Timezone on page 1015 SYSTem TIME ZONE CATalog Querys the list of available timezones Return values Catalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Timezone on page 1015 SYSTem UPTime Queries the up time of the operating system Return values UpTime ddd hh mm ss Example SYSTem UPTime Response 0 08 11 00 Usage Query only SYSTem BIOS VERSion Queries the BIOS versio...

Page 984: ...Example SYSTem OSYStem Response Linux Usage Query only SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Queries the user directory that means the directory the R S SMM100A stores user files on Return values PathUser string Example SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Response var user Usage Query only SYSTem DFPR Queries the device footprint of the instrument The retrieved information is in machine readable form suitable for automat...

Page 985: ...ful for example to execute an SCPI sequence automatically but with a defined time delay between some commands See Chapter 11 3 4 How to assign actions to the User key on page 547 Setting parameters TimeMs integer Wait time in ms Range 0 to 10000 RST 0 Example SYSTem WAIT 10000 Waits 10s before resetting the instrument RST Usage Setting only Manual operation See Wizard on page 546 13 18 STATus subs...

Page 986: ...le 988 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 988 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 988 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 989 STATus QUEue NEXT 989 STATus OPERation CONDition Quieries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instru ment The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the cur...

Page 987: ...1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Opera tion register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part STATus OPERation PTRansition Ptransition Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered f...

Page 988: ...d for a service request If a bit in the ENABle part is 1 and the correesponding EVENt bit is true a positive transition occurs in the summary bit This transition is reportet to the next higher level Parameters Enable string Example STAT QUES ENAB 1 Problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit STATus QUEStionable EVENt Event Queries the content of the EVENt part o...

Page 989: ... in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to SYSTem ERRor NEXT on page 966 Return values Next string Example STATus QUEue queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurre...

Page 990: ... only Manual operation See Execute Baseband Selftest on page 1027 TEST BASeband LOG Queries the log message reported during the baseband test This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it Return values TestBasebandLog string Example SYSTem PROTect1 0 123456 TEST BB BASeband LOG queries the reported message Usage Query only Manual operation See Log Message on page...

Page 991: ...sts the instrument trigger connector of path A Manual operation See Destination on page 1026 TEST BB BNC LOG Queries the log message reported during the BNC connector test This is a password protected function Unlock the protection level 1 to access it Return values Log string Example SYSTem PROTect1 0 123456 TEST BB BNC LOG queries the reported message Usage Query only Manual operation See Log Me...

Page 992: ...veform generating a 3GPP signal Manual operation See Select ARB File on page 1028 TEST BB GENerator FREQuency ch Frequency Sets the frequency of the test sine or constant I Q test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 250E6 to 250E6 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E6 Example TEST BB GENerator FREQuency 50 MHz Manual operation See Frequency on page 1028 TEST BB GENerator GAIN Gain Sets the gain for a sine or...

Page 993: ...ce on page 1028 TEST BB GENerator STATe State Starts the test generator Parameters State 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example TEST BB GENerator STATe ON activates the test generator Manual operation See State on page 1027 TEST hw DIRect BLOCk READ Board SubAddr Addr Len Direct mode for querying the blocks of the hardware assemblies directly The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command any...

Page 994: ...Starts the selftest Use the command TEST hw ALL RESult to query the result TEST hw ALL RESult Queries the result of the performed selftest Start the selftest with TEST hw ALL STARt Return values Result 0 1 RUNning STOPped RST STOPped Usage Query only 13 20 TRIGger subsystem The TRIGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the RF and LF sweep You can work with an intern...

Page 995: ...top mode TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce 995 TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce 995 TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce 995 TRIGger hw SWEep SOURce 995 TRIGger hw FSWeep IMMediate 996 TRIGger hw LFFSweep IMMediate 996 TRIGger hw PSWeep IMMediate 996 TRIGger hw SWEep IMMediate 996 TRIGger hw LFFSweep 997 TRIGger hw FSWeep SOURce Source TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce Source TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce Source TRIGger hw SWEep SOURce...

Page 996: ...ency MODE AUTO STEP In step mode STEP the instrument executes only one step EXTernal An external signal triggers the sweep EAUTo An external signal triggers the sweep When one sweep is fin ished the next sweep starts A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on RST AUTO Example See Example Setup an LF swee...

Page 997: ...R SING TRIG LFFSweep Usage Event 13 21 UNIT subsystem The UNIT subsystem is used to set default units for parameters if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument Example Setting default units for remote control UNIT POW V UNIT ANGL DEG Sets V volts as unit of all power parameters DEG degrees for the phase modulation angle and KMH for the speed UNIT ANGLe ...

Page 998: ...8 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 UNIT POWer Power Sets the default unit for all power parameters This setting affects the GUI as well as all remote control commands that determine power values Parameters Power V DBUV DBM RST DBM UNIT subsystem ...

Page 999: ...nts require that you eliminate the deviation to make sure that the instrument operates correctly To access the notifications and history list dialog see Chapter 14 4 Querying notifica tions on page 1002 In remote control mode you can query the notifications using the command SYSTem ERRor ALL on page 964 14 1 1 Volatile notifications Volatile notifications report automatic settings in the instrumen...

Page 1000: ...on of the error situation The positive error codes mark the errors specific to the instrument The device specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Error code Error Description Remedy 50 Extern reference out of range or disconnected External reference is selected but no external sig nal is applied or t...

Page 1001: ...not valid for the required operation For instance the file extension for waveform list files is wv It is not possible to enter another file extension when selecting a list Check the selected list type 261 Waveform protected The selected waveform file cannot be transferred to a controller The waveform is produced with simulation software R S WinIQSIM2 and is pro tected 460 Cannot open the file The ...

Page 1002: ...nfig Info Notifications 2 For some notifications the information line appears briefly on the block diagram Selecting the info line also opens the dialog The Static Notifications dialog lists the recently monitored notifications chro nologically and displays additional information on the highlighted message The History dialog lists the accumulated messages with a short description Volatile notifica...

Page 1003: ...and SYSTem ERRor ALL on page 964 Each time a SYST ERR ALL query is sent the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared SYSTem ERRor HISTory CLEar on page 966 Clears the messages in the History view 14 5 Resolving network connection failures Several issues may cause failures in the network connection to the instrument This section lists the most likely reasons and the recommended solution...

Page 1004: ...also IP Address on page 600 14 6 Measuring USB cable quality To check the quality of the USB cable see the service manual of the R S SMM100A 14 7 Requesting instrument configuration and specifica tions The R S SMM100A is equipped with various hardware and software components To get an overview of what your instrument is equipped with you can request the assem blies hardware and software options an...

Page 1005: ... The Counter tab provides information on the operation time and number of times the instrument was powered on The remote commands required to query the hardware configuration are described in Chapter 13 7 DIAGnostic subsystem on page 677 Assembly The tables in the tabs show characteristics of the installed assemblies Assembly Assembly designation Part Number Part number of the assembly Serial Numb...

Page 1006: ...options settings Access Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Versions Options The Versions Options dialog shows the version of the installed instrument firm ware the hardware and software options the data sheet and the software compo nents of the firmware The BIOS version is also listed firmware updates do not update the BIOS version The remote commands required to query the hardware con...

Page 1007: ...and Software tabs list the installed hardware and soft ware options Option Short name of option Designation Name of option Licenses optional Number of licenses Expiration Date For regular options Permanent is indicated in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expi ration date After this date the option is no longer available on the instrument Remote comma...

Page 1008: ... options 1 Select System Config Setup Instrument Assembly Versions Options 2 Select Hardware Options The dialog lists all hardware options that are installed on the R S SMM100A Proceed the same way to get information for instance on the firmware or the installed software options in the corresponding tab Checking the RF hardware assembly To find out the installed RF hardware 1 Select System Config ...

Page 1009: ...mbly menu provide useful information Hardware Configuration hardware assemblies Software and Options the status of all software and hardware options instal led on your instrument System Messages displayed in the Info line and provide information on any errors that have occurred Support file a special file tar gz file with important support information that can be created automatically The support ...

Page 1010: ...er support address as listed on the Internet www rohde schwarz com support To remove sensitive data For information on how to handle or remove the sensitive data from your instru ment refer to the description R S SMM100A Instrument Security Procedures Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument has to be transported or shipped see Chapter 15 Transporting on page 1012 14 9 Contacting ...

Page 1011: ... S SMM100A 1011 User Manual 1179 1341 02 05 Contact information Contact our customer support center at www rohde schwarz com support or follow this QR code Figure 14 1 QR code to the Rohde Schwarz support page Contacting customer support ...

Page 1012: ...r electrostatic pro tection and packing material designed for the product If you do not have the original packaging use similar materials that provide the same level of protection Securing When moving the R S SMM100A in a vehicle or using transporting equipment make sure that the R S SMM100A is properly secured Only use items intended for securing objects Transport altitude The maximum transport a...

Page 1013: ...tional capabilities that assure correct functioning Internal adjustments Internal adjustments are integrated self calibration routines which you can execute directly on the instrument Self calibration routines that require additional equipment are performed at an authorized Rohde Schwarz service center For description see R S SMM100A service manual Self test A self test is provided for service pur...

Page 1014: ... a selection list of continents and cities The instrument records the time whenever you create or modify files on your instru ment or you use timed licenses By default the instrument is set to the UTC timezone but you can select the timezone according to your location Moreover the instrument supports NTP protocol for synchronizing all connected instru ments and computer systems to minimize time de...

Page 1015: ...mezone according to the major cities on the respective continents Note By typing the first letter you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the desired destination Remote command SYSTem TIME ZONE on page 983 SYSTem TIME ZONE CATalog on page 983 NTP Address Sets the IP address or host name of the NTP server NTP is a network time protocol used for synchronizing all participating devices in ...

Page 1016: ...time according to the selected location To set the date and time 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select Security Protection 3 Enable the Protection Level 1 The default password is 123456 4 Select Setup Maintenance Date Time 5 Adjust the settings 6 Close the dialogs The instrument adopts the new date and time 16 3 2 Check front panel Within this dialog you can verify the functionality of the control keys H...

Page 1017: ...Calibrate Executes the touchscreen calibration See Calibrating the touchscreen on page 1018 Touchscreen Test Enables you to perform a touchscreen test This test checks whether the touchscreen area has gaps in the response See Testing the touchscreen on page 1020 16 3 2 2 How to test the front panel See Calibrating the touchscreen on page 1018 Testing the key panel on page 1018 Testing the LEDs on ...

Page 1018: ...tenance Check Front Panel The Check Front Panel opens 3 Select Calibrate 4 Tap the calibration points The instrument completes the calibration process automatically and returns to the Check Front Panel dialog Testing the key panel To perform the key panel test you operate the keys at the front panel and check the response of the instrument in the Check Front Panel dialog To perform this test prop ...

Page 1019: ... front panel To perform this test properly check each User connector The test is only completed when you have verified Setup the functionality of all connector LEDs Proceed as follows 1 Press the key 2 Select Maintenance Check Front Panel The Check Front Panel dialog opens 3 Select a User button in the dialog The associated LED in the dialog changes its color Check that the LED of the correspondin...

Page 1020: ... LED turns off After testing all LEDs a Test passed message confirms the success Testing the touchscreen 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select Maintenance Check Front Panel The Check Front Panel dialog opens 3 Select Touchscreen Test to access the Finger Paint test window 4 Drag with your finger one or more lines for example diagonally across the screen The test traces the movements of your finger on the...

Page 1021: ...ample when you press the front panel key for the first time and the color of the button in the dialog turns red instead of green the front panel key has probably stuck 2 Contact the Rohde Schwarz customer support see Chapter 14 8 Collecting information for technical support on page 1009 16 3 3 Internal adjustments Internal adjustments are integrated adjustment procedures which you can execute dire...

Page 1022: ...ings are described in Chapter 13 6 CALibration subsystem on page 673 How to See Chapter 16 3 3 2 How to use the internal adjustments on page 1024 Adjust All Performs all available internal calibration routines of the instrument How to See Chapter 16 3 3 2 How to use the internal adjustments on page 1024 Remote command CALibration ALL MEASure on page 673 Last Full Adjustment Displays the date of th...

Page 1023: ...or is adjusted regarding carrier leakage I Q imbalance and quadrature See also To trigger the internal correction routine of the I Q modulator on page 293 Remote command CALibration hw IQModulator LOCal on page 676 Adjust External Frequency Converter Calibrates the parameters of an externally connected R S SZU IQ Upconverter The function is available when an R S SZU is connected and activated Remo...

Page 1024: ... when the instrument is not warmed up Wait until the instrument has reached its operating temperature before you start the adjustment procedure The warm up time is up to 30 minutes 2 Select System Config Setup Internal Adjustment Adjust All The adjustment process starts If the internal adjustment has started do not interrupt the process A progress indicator shows the status of the adjustment proce...

Page 1025: ...or testing the signal flow at the connectors The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13 19 TEST subsystem on page 989 Execute Baseband Connections Test 1025 BNC Connections Test 1026 Source 1026 Destination 1026 Execute BNC Connection Test 1026 Log Message 1026 Execute Baseband Connections Test Performs a connection test on each of the internal digital baseb...

Page 1026: ...ctor destination to be tested Remote command s TEST BB BNC DESTination on page 991 Execute BNC Connection Test BNC Connections Test Performs the BNC connection test at the selected connectors Remote command TEST BB BNC CONNection on page 990 Log Message BNC Connections Test Displays the log message reported during the BNC connections test Remote command TEST BB BNC LOG on page 991 16 3 4 2 Selftes...

Page 1027: ...aseband test Remote command TEST BASeband LOG on page 990 16 3 4 3 Selftest test generator settings DAC Access 1 This function is password protected Unlock the protection level 1 to access it 2 Select System Config Setup Maintenance Selftest DAC The DAC dialog contains the parameters for testing the IQ signal source The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 13...

Page 1028: ... BB GENerator FREQuency ch on page 992 Select ARB File Provides access to the standard File Select function of the instrument The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self explanatory See also chapter File and Data Management in the R S SMM100A User Manual Remote command TEST BB GENerator ARBitrary on page 992 16 3 4 4 How to set up the R S SMM100A for BNC connections tests 1 This f...

Page 1029: ...ng of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact Disposing electrical and electronic equipment A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted Figure 16 1 Labeling in line with EU directiv...

Page 1030: ...rogram is required TcpClient h include string defines structs for socket handling include netinet in h using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public TcpClient TcpClient void connectToServer string hostname int port void disconnect void transmit string txString void receive string rxString string getCurrentHostName const i...

Page 1031: ...e string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize include netdb h include netinet in h include unistd h include TcpClient h TcpClient TcpClient currentHostName currentPort 0 currentSocketDescr 0 serverAddress currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false receiveBufferSize 1024 TcpC...

Page 1032: ...0 currentHostInfo h_length if connect currentSocketDescr struct sockaddr serverAddress sizeof serverAddress 0 throw string can t connect server n clientIsConnected true void TcpClient disconnect if clientIsConnected close currentSocketDescr currentSocketDescr 0 currentHostName currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false void TcpClient transmit string txString if clientIsConnected th...

Page 1033: ...cr receiveBuffer receiveBufferSize 0 if receivedByteCount 0 throw string error while receiving data n rxString string receiveBuffer receiving receivedByteCount receiveBufferSize delete receiveBuffer string TcpClient getCurrentHostName const return currentHostName int TcpClient getCurrentPort const return currentPort TelnetClient cpp include iostream include TcpClient h void printUsage cout usage E...

Page 1034: ...ient connectToServer hostname port bool terminate false while terminate char buffer 1024 if useSingleCommand input singleCommand send string else cin getline buffer 1024 input buffer if input end terminate true if terminate client transmit input send string int qPos input find 0 receive string only when needed if qPos 0 string rcStr client receive rcStr cout rcStr endl if useSingleCommand terminat...

Page 1035: ...y xml User Correction List User defined level correction values uco List Mode List User defined frequency level value pairs lsw Settings Response file txt NRP Settings Settings R S NRP Settings nrp rsu SCPI command list List Export file containing list of SCPIs iec SCPI command script SCPI script file formats Plain SCPI MATLAB NICVI Python3 txt m c py R S Support Info Archive Support File Automati...

Page 1036: ...nterface messages inac tive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active LOW enables the connected device to send a ser vice request to the controller REN Remote Enable active LOW permits switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parall...

Page 1037: ...on SH1 Handshake source function source handshake full capability AH1 Handshake sink function acceptor handshake full capability L4 Listener function full capability de addressed by MTA T6 Talker function full capability ability to respond to serial poll deaddressed by MLA SR1 Service request function Service Request full capability PP1 Parallel poll function full capability RL1 Remote Local switc...

Page 1038: ... E exa Area surface em2 f F femto Area surface fm2 g G giga Area surface Gm2 Data rate sample rate symbol rate Gbit s Gsample s Gsymbol s Gchip s Frequency GHz Impedance resistance GΩ h H hertz Frequency Hz k K kilo Area surface km2 Data rate sample rate symbol rate kbit s ksample s ksymbol s kchip s Distance length km Frequency kHz Impedance resistance kΩ Velocity km h m M milli Area surface mm2 ...

Page 1039: ...percent Level ratio pico Area surface pm2 Current pA Electromagnetic force level pV Power pW Time period etc ps r R radiant Phase polar spherical coordinates rad s S second Time period etc s t T terra Area surface Tm2 Data rate sample rate symbol rate Tbit s Tsample s Tsym s Tchip s Frequency THz Impedance resistance TΩ u U micro Current µA Distance length µm Electromagnetic force level µV Power µ...

Page 1040: ...interface may consist of several multi plexed channels Do not mistake the term channel used here with the term signal path A digital channel is a part of an I Q stream Clock A mandatory internal or an external reference clock signal for generating the timing pulse in the instrument Complete file path The complete file path specifies the root directory and all subdir ectories that contain a file or...

Page 1041: ...haring according to Server Message Protocol SAMBA SMB G Glossary List of the often used terms and abbreviations GUI Graphical User Interface H HDD Hard disk drive see System drive Hostname Computer name I i e That is I Q Stream Stream L Level In the Baseband domain a term describing the signal level of the independent I and Q signals during signal processing e g baseband signal leveling modulation...

Page 1042: ...nd are generated with the aid of ring shift registers with feedback points determined by the polynomial primary secondary instrument mode Setup with two or more R S SMM100A or one R S SMM100A and several other signal generators such as R S SGT or R S SMBV that generates synchronous and time aligned signals The primary instrument generates and outputs a dedicated synchronization signal Sync Out tha...

Page 1043: ... tablet capable of internet browsing Synonyms Smart phone tablet star configuration A connection scheme for several instruments that consists of one central instrument and several other instruments all connected to the central one Stream An I Q stream describes the signal at the input of the I Q Stream Mapper up to the output connectors of the instrument Symbol Clock Represents the frequency and e...

Page 1044: ...manual trigger U UE User Equipment USBTMC USB Test Measurement Class A protocol built on top of USB for communication with USB devices Using VISA library it supports service request triggers and other specific operations similar to GPIB User directory Describes the default file storage location for user data In the file system user directory is always indicated as var user It is physically located...

Page 1045: ...DIAGnostic hw MEASure POINt 680 DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude 686 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 686 DISPlay ANNotation ALL 686 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe 688 DISPlay DIALog CLOSe ALL 688 DISPlay DIALog ID 687 DISPlay DIALog OPEN 687 DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 685 DISPlay PSAVe STATe 685 DISPlay UPDate STATe 686 FORMat BORDer 689 FORMat SREGister 689 FORMat DATA 689 HCOPy DATA 691 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 691 HCOP...

Page 1046: ...STATe 697 OUTPut hw IMPedance 697 OUTPut hw PROTection CLEar 698 OUTPut hw PROTection TRIPped 698 OUTPut hw TM ch DIRection 733 OUTPut hw TM ch SIGNal 734 OUTPut hw STATe 696 OUTPut hw STATe PON 696 READ ch POWer 705 SCONfiguration EXTernal ACONnect 720 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch DIRection 721 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch INAMe 722 SCONfiguration EXTernal CODer ch IQConnection STATe 722 ...

Page 1047: ...n STATe 722 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote CONNect 727 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote DISConnect 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote ICONnect 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INFO 728 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote INITialization FILE 729 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote ISELect 727 SCONfiguration EXTernal IQOutput ch REMote SE...

Page 1048: ...ing IQOutput ch STReam st STATe 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing RF ch STReam st STATe 717 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing STReam st FOFFset 718 SCONfiguration OUTPut MAPPing STReam st POFFset 718 SENSe ch UNIT POWer 705 SENSe ch POWer APERture DEFault STATe 706 SENSe ch POWer APERture TIMe 706 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice LIST 707 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice SELect 706 SENSe ch POWer ...

Page 1049: ...972 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE 972 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork MACaddress 973 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource 973 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESTart 973 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus 973 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon DOMain 973 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup 974 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS 974 SYSTem...

Page 1050: ...L 970 SYSTem REBoot 985 SYSTem RESTart 985 SYSTem SAV 969 SYSTem SECurity SANitize STATe 979 SYSTem SECurity SUPolicy 979 SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe 970 SYSTem SHUTdown 985 SYSTem SPECification IDENtification CATalog 980 SYSTem SPECification PARameter 980 SYSTem SPECification VERSion 979 SYSTem SPECification VERSion CATalog 980 SYSTem SPECification VERSion FACTory 981 SYSTem SPECification 979 S...

Page 1051: ...B IMPairment BBMM ch LEAKage I 869 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch LEAKage Q 869 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch POFFset 871 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch QUADrature ANGLe 869 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch SKEW 870 SOURce BB IMPairment BBMM ch STATe 870 SOURce BB IMPairment FADer ch QUADrature ANGLe 869 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch DELay 868 SOURce BB IMPairment IQOutput ch IQRatio MAGNitude 868 SOURc...

Page 1052: ...XTernal FREQuency VARiable 946 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal MLRange 947 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal NSBandwidth 947 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal RFOFf STATe 946 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal SBANdwidth 947 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut ALTernate FREQuency MODE 948 SOURce ROSCillator OUTPut FREQuency MODE 948 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce 946 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 949 SOURce ROSCillator INTe...

Page 1053: ...CARrier CLOad 826 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLOCk 827 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CREate 827 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier DELay STEP 831 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier DELay STARt 832 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier EXECute 832 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier FILE 832 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier PHASe STEP 831 SOURc...

Page 1054: ...t 837 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SMODe 817 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SOURce 836 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal DELay 839 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 840 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal RDELay 839 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut 838 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal TDELay 839 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal AWGN CREate 8...

Page 1055: ...EGment CONFigure SEGMent APPend 820 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SEGMent CATalog 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect 821 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate 816 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment LMODe 815 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NAME 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute 814 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment N...

Page 1056: ...e 790 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt FREE 791 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt POINts 792 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt SELect 790 SOURce hw BB DM FORMat 778 SOURce hw BB DM FSK DEViation 779 SOURce hw BB DM FSK VARiable SYMBol ch0 DEViation 780 SOURce hw BB DM FSK VARiable TYPE 780 SOURce hw BB DM MLISt CATalog 789 SOURce hw BB DM MLISt DELete 790 SOURce hw BB DM MLISt FREE 791 SOURce hw BB DM MLISt POINts 792 SOURce hw BB ...

Page 1057: ...IGger EXTernal INHibit 787 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal RDELay 786 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal TDELay 786 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger SEQuence 783 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh 833 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh APPLy 835 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh CLOCk 833 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh COUNt 834 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch BWIDth RELative 835 SOURce hw BB EUTRa NOTCh ch BWIDth ABSolute 835 SOURce hw BB EUTRa...

Page 1058: ...Put ch PULSe DIVider 858 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency 858 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger RMODe 855 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SLENgth 855 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SOURce 855 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal DELay 856 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal INHibit 856 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SEQuence 856 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh 833 SOURce hw BB OFDM NOTCh APPLy 835 SOURce hw BB OF...

Page 1059: ...ENSor ch POWer SONCe 879 SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA SENSor ch POWer SONCe 880 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect 879 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog 881 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension 881 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect 882 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn 882 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal 882 SOURce hw CORRec...

Page 1060: ...hw INPut TM CLOCk SLOPe 739 SOURce hw INPut TM TRIGger IMPedance 738 SOURce hw INPut TM TRIGger LEVel 738 SOURce hw INPut TM TRIGger SLOPe 739 SOURce hw INPut TM ch DIRection 733 SOURce hw INPut TM ch SIGNal 733 SOURce hw INPut TRIGger SLOPe 895 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor 897 SOURce hw IQ GAIN 896 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude 868 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage I 869 SOURce hw IQ IMPair...

Page 1061: ...Rce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe DCYCle 908 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe PERiod 908 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe PULSe WIDTh 909 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze FALL 909 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze HIGH 909 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze PERiod 909 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRAPeze RISE 910 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle PERiod 910 SOURce hw LFOutput ch SHAPe TRIangle RI...

Page 1062: ...OURce hw PHASe 933 SOURce hw PHASe REFerence 933 SOURce hw PM DEViation MODE 760 SOURce hw PM DEViation SUM 761 SOURce hw PM MODE 760 SOURce hw PM RATio 761 SOURce hw PM SENSitivity 761 SOURce hw PM ch SOURce 759 SOURce hw PM ch STATe 759 SOURce hw POWer ALC DAMPlifier 935 SOURce hw POWer ALC DSENsitivity 936 SOURce hw POWer ALC MODE 934 SOURce hw POWer ALC SLEVel 936 SOURce hw POWer ALC SONCe 936...

Page 1063: ...ed MODE 959 SOURce hw SWEep COMBined RETRace 960 SOURce hw SWEep COMBined SHAPe 960 SOURce hw SWEep POWer DWELl 952 SOURce hw SWEep POWer EXECute 955 SOURce hw SWEep POWer MODE 952 SOURce hw SWEep POWer POINts 953 SOURce hw SWEep POWer RETRace 956 SOURce hw SWEep POWer RUNNing 956 SOURce hw SWEep POWer SHAPe 955 SOURce hw SWEep POWer SPACing MODE 953 SOURce hw SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 953 SOUR...

Page 1064: ...ateN 1 184 MAP LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 193 MARKER LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 184 MARKER LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 193 MARKER MODE GENERATOR 183 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE Mode 187 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK ClockSeg0 ClockSeg1 ClockSegN 1 188 MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT NumOfSeg 186 MWV_SEGMENT_DURATION SegDur0 SegDur1 SegDurN 1 187 MWV_SEGMENT_FILES FileNameSeg0...

Page 1065: ...ete ALL 681 DIAGnostic HUMS DEVice HISTory DELete ALL 682 DIAGnostic HUMS DEVice HISTory 681 DIAGnostic HUMS FORMat 682 DIAGnostic HUMS SAVE 682 DIAGnostic HUMS STATe 682 SYSTem COMMunicate REST ENABle 683 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RO 683 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW 683 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion 684 ...

Page 1066: ...asurement period 453 Active connections Remote access 606 Active elements 75 Add LAN sensor NRP sensor mapping 409 Add sensor NRP sensor mapping 409 Add USBTMC sensor NRP sensor mapping 409 Add change delete User key action 547 Additive noise 268 Address GPIB interface 603 Adjust BB input signal 475 Display and keyboard 523 Display settings 522 External frequency converter 1023 I Q modulator 289 1...

Page 1067: ...6 Automatic level control Detector sensitivity 392 Driver amplifier 393 Mode 392 Readjust internal switch position 305 RF signal 390 Sample level 393 Settings 391 State 392 Automation 579 Autonegotiation Failed 1003 Avahi LAN services 570 Average level Power viewer 413 Avoiding signal gaps 205 Avoiding wrap around 205 AWGN Additive white Gaussian noise 262 Subsystem 859 AWGN mode 268 AWGN test sig...

Page 1068: ... 464 Cleaning 1013 Clear NRP sensor mapping 409 RF output protection 389 User menu 543 Clear history Undo Redo 578 Clear status Remote 655 Clipping 236 CList See control list 134 173 Clock Connectors 90 Frequency 155 Rate 155 Clock rate Blank segment 211 Clock rate mode Multi segment waveform 212 Clock signal Internal 90 Clock source 114 Internal 90 Close Show SCPI command 636 Coding DM 118 Combin...

Page 1069: ...at 134 173 Binary format 174 Edit rules 176 How to assign 135 175 Manually Control data editor 134 Select 120 Select edit new 501 Tags 173 Control signal 90 Copy Instrument settings 505 Several files 503 511 512 Show SCPI command 636 Counter 1005 Couple I Q bias 480 Coupling mode AM FM PhiM 379 External modulation input 379 Create 209 239 Multi carrier waveforms 230 New directory 505 Create and lo...

Page 1070: ...nal RF and I Q instrument 464 Detector sensitivity Automatic level control 392 Deviation Fixed total deviation 366 367 FSK modulation 122 PhiM 366 Variable FSK 123 Deviation mode AM 368 Amplitude modulation 368 FM 365 Frequency modulation 365 Phase modulation 367 PhiM 367 Device ID 552 984 NRP sensor mapping 409 Device reset 659 Device specific notifications 1000 DHCP 620 Dialog Snapshots 524 Dial...

Page 1071: ...F power ramping 154 No or empty waveform file 154 Error messages 1002 Adjustment data invalid 183 1001 Adjustment data missing 182 1000 Adjustment failed 180 1000 Cannot access hardware 200 1001 Cannot access the EEPROM 202 1001 Cannot open file 460 1001 Cannot read file 462 1001 Cannot write file 461 1001 Driver initialization failed 204 1001 Extern reference out of range or disconnected 50 1000 ...

Page 1072: ... sharing 509 File storage location 661 File system 483 Accessing 509 File transfer 485 From file server 514 FTP SAMBA 579 How to 509 File type selection 504 Files User data 483 Fill User correction data 354 401 Fill table Automatically 354 401 UCOR 398 Fill with sensor Basics 402 Editor 354 401 Filter DM 124 Power sensors 415 Filter cut off frequency 236 Filter length Auto 415 User defiend 415 Fil...

Page 1073: ...23 631 Channel address 603 Characteristics 585 Interface 585 Set up remote control 631 Visa resource string 602 GPIB address Factory preset 631 Graphical signal monitoring 421 Graphics Number of samples 430 GSM EDGE 85 GUI Setting 526 GUI update Setup 522 H Hard copy Create how to 519 File format 517 Print how to 519 Hard disk drive 44 Hardcopy 515 Options 517 Hardware channel External RF and I Q ...

Page 1074: ...sts 350 Select file 351 405 Inactive licenses 553 Index List mode 346 Info line 75 1002 Information Internal adjustments 1023 Inhibit trigger 100 Input Clock slope 538 541 Impedance Clock Trigger 538 540 Impedance external modulations 379 Pulse impedance 364 Pulse polarity 364 Pulse threshold 364 538 Threshold Clock Trigger 538 540 Trigger slope 538 541 Input connector 39 40 43 44 45 46 Input wave...

Page 1075: ...612 Samba services 571 Services 569 LAN configuration 619 LXI 614 LAN interface Avahi 570 Enable 570 FTP 570 HTTP 570 LAN over SCPI 570 SMB Samba 570 SSH 570 VNC 570 LAN status LXI 612 Language Emulation 605 Last factory calibration 1006 Last full adjustment Internal adjustments 1022 Layout Keyboard 524 Learn List mode 348 Learn list mode data List mode 348 LED test Check front panel 1019 Length C...

Page 1076: ...0 Load list 208 Load user mapping 122 Loading Trying out 62 Local connector T M C 529 Local oscillator About 305 Adjust LO level 308 Mandatory LO in frequency 308 Options 306 Out state 307 Settings 307 Local to remote switch over 633 Lock Display 568 Log debug info Internal adjustments 1023 LSB MSB order Definition 689 LTE advanced 87 LTE Rel 8 Rel 9 Rel 10 Rel 11 Rel 12 Rel 13 Rel 14 87 LTE A 87 ...

Page 1077: ...ti carrier CW 247 Subsystem 843 Multi carrier waveforms 230 Multi instrument setup Simultaneous signal generation start 444 Synchronous signals 444 Time aligned signals 444 Multi segment Crest factor 221 Multi segment table 210 Multi segment waveform File contents 209 Multi segment waveform sequencing 201 Multiple files Copy 503 511 512 Multiplier Frequency 299 N Naming conventions Allowed file na...

Page 1078: ...Optimize crest factor Multi carrier 236 Optimize for current setting 291 Option Expiration date 1007 R S SMM B9 45 R S SMM K16 46 R S SMM K17 46 Option expiration date 1007 Options Analog modulation 357 Identification remote 656 Local oscillator 306 see User Manual 68 Oscillator Adjust LO level 308 Mandatory LO in frequency 308 Mode local 307 Reference 311 Output SCPI list select file 638 Source L...

Page 1079: ...rier Interferer 273 Carrier Noise 273 Connecting the instrument 28 First carrier 253 Signal Interferer 273 Signal Noise 273 UCOR 398 Power amplifiers testing Envelope 479 Power of starting carrier 243 Power on Key 37 Power ramp Restrict to baseband 127 Power ramping 91 126 Power reference 237 Power sensors Activation 414 Aperture time 416 Auto once 416 Filter 415 Filter length 415 Frequency 415 Le...

Page 1080: ...and I Q instrument 464 Q Q offset 277 QR code 610 Quadrature offset Impairments 281 Quadrature Offset 278 Quantified Licenses 554 Queries Status 596 Questionable status register 595 Quick shift of the baseband signal How to 260 R R S signed packages Secure update policy 565 R S SMM K200 554 Rack installation 43 Rack mounting 26 Ramp All up or all down 132 Low to high and vice versa 132 Ramp functi...

Page 1081: ...ce subsystem 731 Trace 468 Remote operation 81 VNC 579 Remote trace LXI 616 Removing sensitive data 1009 REN 1036 Rename File 671 Instrument settings 505 Renew Occupation 556 Resampling External baseband signal 453 Reset List mode 348 RF frequency delta phase 300 Sweep 341 Reset device parameters 659 Reset values Remote 657 Resolution Graphics 431 Resource string RS232 585 USB 584 VISA 582 Restart...

Page 1082: ...657 672 Save intermediate 657 Save list 208 Save Recall 235 493 Dialog 493 Digital standard 494 DM 117 Firmware option settings 494 How to 497 I Q output analog 479 SCPI Export 640 Saving Trying out 61 Saving files 662 Scan NRP sensor mapping 409 Scan for External RF and I Q instrument 464 SCONfiguration subsystem 713 SCPI Error messages 1000 Export 502 Export settings 637 Import 502 LAN services ...

Page 1083: ...117 Set connector default settings Global connectors 373 Set IDN and OPT to default Emulation mode 605 Set noise level via 270 Set to default 235 ARB 154 DM 117 MCCW 250 Set up remote control GPIB 631 Settings Active connections 606 Appearance 524 Attenuator 388 Automatic level control 391 Check front panel 1016 Display 523 FM 365 Instrument emulations 604 Internal adjustments 1022 Keyboard 523 Li...

Page 1084: ...ftkey bar see Taskbar 74 Software options 68 Solid state drive 44 Source AM FM ΦM 365 Analog modulation 357 Connection selftest BNC 1026 External digital signal 472 Graphics 430 LF output 381 385 Power ramp control 126 Power sensors 414 Pulse modulation 363 Reference oscillator 312 Sweep trigger 338 Test generator selftest 1028 Source points for graphic display 426 Source subsystem Remote control ...

Page 1085: ...license 929 OUTPut 731 Phase 933 PM 757 Power 934 PULM 762 Pulse generator 931 SOURce INPut 731 Sum signal How to shift basebands 260 Support 1009 Suppressing Carrier leakage 260 Surveillance Signal generation 421 Swap Digital input signals 472 Sweep Center frequency 342 Current frequency 338 Current level 338 Dwell time 340 Execute single 340 Frequency span 342 Mode 338 Reset 341 Retrace 339 Shap...

Page 1086: ...rs 416 Tooltips Show 79 Touch panel see Touchscreen 1018 Touch screen see Touchscreen 1018 Touchscreen Adjusting 1018 Alignment 1018 Calibrate 1017 Calibration 1018 Compared with mouse 71 Overview 35 Test 1017 Usage 71 Touchscreen calibration Check front panel 1018 Touchscreen test Perform 1020 Trace Enable in graphic 433 Tracing Messages 632 SCPI commands 632 Tracking Signal parameter 421 Transit...

Page 1087: ...546 547 SCPI command 547 Select dialog ID 547 Settings 546 Toggle between define and execute mode 547 User manual 18 User mapping Catalog 122 Delete 122 User menu 542 Access 544 Clear 543 Create 544 Recall 543 Save 543 Settings 543 User name Setup security 572 User password Security 573 Setup 573 User preset 488 User variation Activating 299 305 Level 299 305 RF 299 305 User definable preset Recal...

Page 1088: ...372 PULM 372 Pulse modulation 372 Wireless LAN standards 86 WLAN standards 86 Workflow Multi segment waveform 222 Workgroup name 600 Wrap around Avoiding problems 232 Overcome problem 224 Z Zero Power Sensors 414 Zeroconf IP address 1003 Zeroconf APIPA protocol 620 Zoom Control list display 133 Zoom In Out Pulse graph 375 Zoom position Pulse graph 375 Zooming Pulse graph 375 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SMM100A

Brand: Saint Productions Pages: 16

Brand: Baldor Pages: 37

SONOREX TECHNIK TG Series

Brand: BANDELIN Pages: 25

Architectual AQ215

Brand: Martin Audio Pages: 1

Brand: Firman Pages: 51

Brand: NextBase Pages: 54

Brand: GENMAX Pages: 28

Brand: Consort Pages: 30

Brand: Olin Pages: 26

Brand: Sangean Pages: 1

Brand: PortaCo Pages: 28

GP Series 005938-0

Brand: Generac Power Systems Pages: 56

Brand: Briggs & Stratton Pages: 156

Brand: Olin Pages: 27

Brand: ETQ Pages: 32

Brand: Philips Pages: 3

Brand: Honda Pages: 38

Brand: VIETA Pages: 35

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands